84286
|
1 \input texinfo
|
|
2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling:
|
|
3 @c
|
|
4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them.
|
|
5 @c
|
|
6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in
|
|
7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives
|
|
8 @c are significant.
|
|
9
|
|
10 @c Conventions for formatting examples:
|
|
11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty
|
|
12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise.
|
|
13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where
|
|
14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant.
|
|
15 @c o Format line number columns like this:
|
|
16 @c 1: foo
|
|
17 @c 2: bar
|
|
18 @c ^ one space
|
|
19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment
|
|
20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer
|
|
21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented.
|
|
22
|
|
23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring?
|
|
24
|
|
25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
|
|
27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
28
|
|
29
|
|
30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
31 @comment How to make the various output formats:
|
|
32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.)
|
|
33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed.
|
|
34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
35 @ignore
|
|
36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a
|
|
37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals,
|
|
38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
|
|
39 ## Info output
|
|
40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi
|
|
41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
|
|
42
|
|
43 ## DVI output
|
|
44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so
|
|
45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex
|
|
46 ## manpage.
|
|
47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi
|
|
48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi
|
|
49
|
|
50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional)
|
|
51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi
|
|
52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
|
|
53
|
|
54 ## Plain text output
|
|
55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
|
|
56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi
|
|
57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
|
|
58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
|
|
59
|
|
60 ## DocBook output
|
|
61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
|
|
62 cc-mode.texi
|
|
63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
|
|
64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
|
|
65
|
|
66 ## XML output
|
|
67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
|
|
68 cc-mode.texi
|
|
69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
|
|
70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
|
|
71
|
|
72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.)
|
|
73
|
|
74 ## View DVI output
|
|
75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi &
|
|
76
|
|
77 ## View HTML output
|
|
78 mozilla cc-mode.html
|
|
79 @end ignore
|
|
80
|
|
81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file.
|
|
82 @finalout
|
|
83
|
|
84 @setfilename ../info/ccmode
|
|
85 @settitle CC Mode Manual
|
|
86 @footnotestyle end
|
|
87
|
|
88 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
|
|
89 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
|
|
90 @c Texinfo variable `XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
|
|
91 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g. with
|
|
92 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
|
|
93 @ifset XEMACS
|
|
94 @macro emacsman
|
|
95 xemacs
|
|
96 @end macro
|
|
97 @macro emacsmantitle
|
|
98 XEmacs User's Manual
|
|
99 @end macro
|
|
100 @macro lispref
|
|
101 lispref
|
|
102 @end macro
|
|
103 @macro lispreftitle
|
|
104 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual
|
|
105 @end macro
|
|
106 @end ifset
|
|
107
|
|
108 @ifclear XEMACS
|
|
109 @macro emacsman
|
|
110 emacs
|
|
111 @end macro
|
|
112 @macro emacsmantitle
|
|
113 GNU Emacs Manual
|
|
114 @end macro
|
|
115 @macro lispref
|
|
116 elisp
|
|
117 @end macro
|
|
118 @macro lispreftitle
|
|
119 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual
|
|
120 @end macro
|
|
121 @end ifclear
|
|
122
|
|
123
|
|
124 @macro ccmode
|
|
125 CC Mode
|
|
126 @end macro
|
|
127
|
|
128 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
129 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !!
|
|
130 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
|
|
131 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
132
|
|
133
|
|
134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
135 @comment
|
|
136 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode
|
|
137 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola
|
|
138 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu>
|
|
139 @comment
|
|
140 @comment Authors:
|
|
141 @comment Barry A. Warsaw
|
|
142 @comment Martin Stjernholm
|
|
143 @comment Alan Mackenzie
|
|
144 @comment
|
|
145 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org>
|
|
146 @comment
|
|
147 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
148
|
|
149 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols.
|
|
150 @ifnottex @c In texi2dvi, the @defindex would create an empty cc-mode.ss
|
|
151 @c For Info, unlike tex, @syncodeindex needs a matching @defindex.
|
|
152 @defindex ss
|
|
153 @end ifnottex
|
|
154
|
|
155 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one.
|
|
156 @syncodeindex ss cp
|
|
157 @syncodeindex ky cp
|
|
158
|
|
159 @copying
|
|
160 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs.
|
|
161
|
|
162 Copyright @copyright{} 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002,
|
|
163 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
164
|
|
165 @quotation
|
|
166 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
|
167 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or
|
|
168 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
|
|
169 Invariant Sections being ``The GNU Manifesto'', ``Distribution'' and
|
|
170 ``GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE'', with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU
|
|
171 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the
|
|
172 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation
|
|
173 License'' in the Emacs manual.
|
|
174
|
|
175 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify
|
|
176 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free
|
|
177 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.''
|
|
178
|
|
179 This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free
|
|
180 Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document
|
|
181 separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the
|
|
182 license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license.
|
|
183 @end quotation
|
|
184 @end copying
|
|
185
|
|
186 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation
|
|
187 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks.
|
|
188 @dircategory Emacs
|
|
189 @direntry
|
|
190 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C,
|
|
191 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code.
|
|
192 @end direntry
|
|
193
|
|
194 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
195 @comment TeX title page
|
|
196 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
197
|
|
198 @titlepage
|
|
199 @sp 10
|
|
200
|
|
201 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.31}
|
|
202 @sp 2
|
|
203 @center @subtitlefont{A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages}
|
|
204 @sp 2
|
|
205 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie
|
|
206
|
|
207 @page
|
|
208 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
|
|
209 @insertcopying
|
|
210
|
|
211 This manual was generated from $Revision$ of $RCSfile$, which can be
|
|
212 downloaded from
|
|
213 @url{http://cvs.savannah.gnu.org/viewcvs/emacs/emacs/man/cc-mode.texi}.
|
|
214 @end titlepage
|
|
215
|
|
216 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
217 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file.
|
|
218 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual.
|
|
219 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
220
|
|
221 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
|
|
222 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
223
|
|
224 @ifinfo
|
|
225 @top @ccmode{}
|
|
226
|
|
227 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++,
|
|
228 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike
|
|
229 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and
|
|
230 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing
|
|
231 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between
|
|
232 functions, classes etc - there are other packages for that.
|
|
233 @end ifinfo
|
|
234
|
|
235 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
236 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
237
|
|
238 @menu
|
|
239 * Introduction::
|
|
240 * Overview::
|
|
241 * Getting Started::
|
|
242 * Commands::
|
|
243 * Font Locking::
|
|
244 * Config Basics::
|
|
245 * Custom Filling and Breaking::
|
|
246 * Custom Auto-newlines::
|
|
247 * Clean-ups::
|
|
248 * Indentation Engine Basics::
|
|
249 * Customizing Indentation::
|
|
250 * Custom Macros::
|
|
251 * Odds and Ends::
|
|
252 * Sample .emacs File::
|
|
253 * Performance Issues::
|
|
254 * Limitations and Known Bugs::
|
|
255 * FAQ::
|
|
256 * Updating CC Mode::
|
|
257 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports::
|
|
258 * GNU Free Documentation License::
|
|
259 * Command and Function Index::
|
|
260 * Variable Index::
|
|
261 * Concept and Key Index::
|
|
262
|
|
263 @detailmenu
|
|
264 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
|
|
265
|
|
266 Commands
|
|
267
|
|
268 * Indentation Commands::
|
|
269 * Comment Commands::
|
|
270 * Movement Commands::
|
|
271 * Filling and Breaking::
|
|
272 * Minor Modes::
|
|
273 * Electric Keys::
|
|
274 * Auto-newlines::
|
|
275 * Hungry WS Deletion::
|
|
276 * Subword Movement::
|
|
277 * Other Commands::
|
|
278
|
|
279 Font Locking
|
|
280
|
|
281 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
|
|
282 * Faces::
|
|
283 * Doc Comments::
|
|
284 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
|
|
285
|
|
286 Configuration Basics
|
|
287
|
|
288 * CC Hooks::
|
|
289 * Style Variables::
|
|
290 * Styles::
|
|
291
|
|
292 Styles
|
|
293
|
|
294 * Built-in Styles::
|
|
295 * Choosing a Style::
|
|
296 * Adding Styles::
|
|
297 * File Styles::
|
|
298
|
|
299 Customizing Auto-newlines
|
|
300
|
|
301 * Hanging Braces::
|
|
302 * Hanging Colons::
|
|
303 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
|
|
304
|
|
305 Hanging Braces
|
|
306
|
|
307 * Custom Braces::
|
|
308
|
|
309 Indentation Engine Basics
|
|
310
|
|
311 * Syntactic Analysis::
|
|
312 * Syntactic Symbols::
|
|
313 * Indentation Calculation::
|
|
314
|
|
315 Syntactic Symbols
|
|
316
|
|
317 * Function Symbols::
|
|
318 * Class Symbols::
|
|
319 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
|
|
320 * Switch Statement Symbols::
|
|
321 * Brace List Symbols::
|
|
322 * External Scope Symbols::
|
|
323 * Paren List Symbols::
|
|
324 * Literal Symbols::
|
|
325 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
|
|
326 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
|
|
327 * Anonymous Class Symbol::
|
|
328 * Statement Block Symbols::
|
|
329 * K&R Symbols::
|
|
330
|
|
331 Customizing Indentation
|
|
332
|
|
333 * c-offsets-alist::
|
|
334 * Interactive Customization::
|
|
335 * Line-Up Functions::
|
|
336 * Custom Line-Up::
|
|
337 * Other Indentation::
|
|
338
|
|
339 Line-Up Functions
|
|
340
|
|
341 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
|
|
342 * List Line-Up::
|
|
343 * Operator Line-Up::
|
|
344 * Comment Line-Up::
|
|
345 * Misc Line-Up::
|
|
346
|
|
347 @end detailmenu
|
|
348 @end menu
|
|
349
|
|
350 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
351 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top
|
|
352 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
353 @chapter Introduction
|
|
354 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
355
|
|
356 @cindex BOCM
|
|
357 @cindex history
|
|
358 @cindex awk-mode.el
|
|
359 @cindex c-mode.el
|
|
360 @cindex c++-mode.el
|
|
361
|
|
362 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C,
|
|
363 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and
|
|
364 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended
|
|
365 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM
|
|
366 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been
|
|
367 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode
|
|
368 in the (X)Emacs base.
|
|
369
|
|
370 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{}
|
|
371 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin
|
|
372 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the
|
|
373 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not
|
|
374 originally contain the font lock support for its languages --- that
|
|
375 was added in version 5.30.
|
|
376
|
|
377 This manual describes @ccmode{}
|
|
378 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the
|
|
379 version 5.31.
|
|
380 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically
|
|
381
|
|
382 @ccmode{} supports the editing of K&R and ANSI C, C++, Objective-C,
|
|
383 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like
|
|
384 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD
|
|
385 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this
|
|
386 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for
|
|
387 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as
|
|
388 uniformly integrated as the other languages.
|
|
389
|
|
390 @findex c-mode
|
|
391 @findex c++-mode
|
|
392 @findex objc-mode
|
|
393 @findex java-mode
|
|
394 @findex idl-mode
|
|
395 @findex pike-mode
|
|
396 @findex awk-mode
|
|
397 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top
|
|
398 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and
|
|
399 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and
|
|
400 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode},
|
|
401 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are
|
|
402 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for
|
|
403 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}.
|
|
404
|
|
405 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in
|
|
406 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd
|
|
407 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously
|
|
408 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development.
|
|
409
|
|
410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
411 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top
|
|
412 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual
|
|
413 @chapter Overview of the Manual
|
|
414 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
415
|
|
416 @noindent
|
|
417 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this
|
|
418 one).
|
|
419
|
|
420 @noindent
|
|
421 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of
|
|
422 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it).
|
|
423
|
|
424 @itemize @bullet
|
|
425 @item
|
|
426 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all
|
|
427 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from
|
|
428 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you
|
|
429 how to customize these features.
|
|
430
|
|
431 @item
|
|
432 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to
|
|
433 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped
|
|
434 over at a first reading.
|
|
435 @end itemize
|
|
436
|
|
437 @noindent
|
|
438 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize}
|
|
439 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter
|
|
440 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in
|
|
441 increasing detail.
|
|
442
|
|
443 @itemize @bullet
|
|
444 @item
|
|
445 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write
|
|
446 customizations - whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither,
|
|
447 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and
|
|
448 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies.
|
|
449
|
|
450 @item
|
|
451 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various
|
|
452 features of @ccmode{}.
|
|
453
|
|
454 @item
|
|
455 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you
|
|
456 in creating your own customization.
|
|
457 @end itemize
|
|
458
|
|
459 @noindent
|
|
460 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly
|
|
461 into any of the previous chunks.
|
|
462
|
|
463 @itemize @bullet
|
|
464 @item
|
|
465 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known
|
|
466 bugs/limitations.
|
|
467
|
|
468 @item
|
|
469 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions.
|
|
470
|
|
471 @item
|
|
472 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{}
|
|
473 project - whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports.
|
|
474 @end itemize
|
|
475
|
|
476 @noindent
|
|
477 Finally, there are the customary indices.
|
|
478
|
|
479 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
480 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top
|
|
481 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
482 @chapter Getting Started
|
|
483 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
484
|
|
485 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should
|
|
486 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not
|
|
487 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy
|
|
488 (see below).
|
|
489
|
|
490 You should probably start by skimming through the entire chapter
|
|
491 @ref{Commands} to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities.
|
|
492
|
|
493 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of
|
|
494 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to
|
|
495 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often
|
|
496 want to change:
|
|
497
|
|
498 @table @asis
|
|
499 @item c-basic-offset
|
|
500 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{}
|
|
501 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize
|
|
502 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
|
|
503
|
|
504 @example
|
|
505 (setq c-basic-offset 6)
|
|
506 @end example
|
|
507
|
|
508 @item The (indentation) style
|
|
509 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default,
|
|
510 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of
|
|
511 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in
|
|
512 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{}
|
|
513 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in
|
|
514 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either
|
|
515 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
|
|
516
|
|
517 @example
|
|
518 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
|
|
519 (awk-mode . "awk")
|
|
520 (other . "linux")))
|
|
521 @end example
|
|
522
|
|
523 @item Electric Indentation
|
|
524 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or
|
|
525 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can
|
|
526 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric
|
|
527 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same
|
|
528 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by
|
|
529 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There
|
|
530 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}:
|
|
531
|
|
532 @example
|
|
533 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil)
|
|
534 @end example
|
|
535
|
|
536 @noindent
|
|
537 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the
|
|
538 section @ref{Minor Modes}.
|
|
539
|
|
540 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line
|
|
541 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you
|
|
542 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that
|
|
543 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet
|
|
544 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has
|
|
545 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}:
|
|
546
|
|
547 @example
|
|
548 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent ()
|
|
549 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
|
|
550 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent)
|
|
551 @end example
|
|
552
|
|
553 @noindent
|
|
554 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and
|
|
555 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described
|
|
556 in @ref{CC Hooks}.
|
|
557 @end table
|
|
558
|
|
559 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before}
|
|
560 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of
|
|
561 @code{desktop-read}.
|
|
562
|
|
563 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more
|
|
564 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start
|
|
565 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}.
|
|
566
|
|
567 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see
|
|
568 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if
|
|
569 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to
|
|
570 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete
|
|
571 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs.
|
|
572 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See
|
|
573 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net}
|
|
574 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility
|
|
575 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}).
|
|
576
|
|
577 @deffn Command c-version
|
|
578 @findex version (c-)
|
|
579 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C
|
|
580 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in
|
|
581 the echo area:
|
|
582
|
|
583 @example
|
|
584 Using CC Mode version 5.XX
|
|
585 @end example
|
|
586
|
|
587 @noindent
|
|
588 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number.
|
|
589 @end deffn
|
|
590
|
|
591 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
592 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top
|
|
593 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
594 @chapter Commands
|
|
595 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
596
|
|
597 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains
|
|
598 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as
|
|
599 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both
|
|
600 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters
|
|
601 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the
|
|
602 buffer, also do other things.
|
|
603
|
|
604 You might well want to review
|
|
605 @ifset XEMACS
|
|
606 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
|
|
607 @end ifset
|
|
608 @ifclear XEMACS
|
|
609 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
|
|
610 @end ifclear
|
|
611 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis
|
|
612 structures.
|
|
613
|
|
614
|
|
615 @menu
|
|
616 * Indentation Commands::
|
|
617 * Comment Commands::
|
|
618 * Movement Commands::
|
|
619 * Filling and Breaking::
|
|
620 * Minor Modes::
|
|
621 * Electric Keys::
|
|
622 * Auto-newlines::
|
|
623 * Hungry WS Deletion::
|
|
624 * Subword Movement::
|
|
625 * Other Commands::
|
|
626 @end menu
|
|
627
|
|
628 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
629 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands
|
|
630 @comment node-name, next, previous,up
|
|
631 @section Indentation Commands
|
|
632 @cindex indentation
|
|
633 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
634
|
|
635 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you
|
|
636 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other
|
|
637 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You
|
|
638 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects
|
|
639 of your changes.
|
|
640
|
|
641 @cindex GNU indent program
|
|
642 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list}
|
|
643 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is
|
|
644 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then
|
|
645 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this,
|
|
646 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
|
|
647 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
|
|
648
|
|
649 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
|
|
650 code, i.e. they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
|
|
651 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
|
|
652
|
|
653 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
|
|
654 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
|
|
655 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
|
|
656 hint about the syntactic context, i.e. whether the macro expands to an
|
|
657 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
|
|
658 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
|
|
659 out correctly most of the time, though.
|
|
660
|
|
661 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When
|
|
662 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to
|
|
663 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region.
|
|
664
|
|
665 These commands indent code:
|
|
666
|
|
667 @table @asis
|
|
668 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command})
|
|
669 @kindex TAB
|
|
670 @findex c-indent-command
|
|
671 @findex indent-command (c-)
|
|
672 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know
|
|
673 about it for normal use.
|
|
674
|
|
675 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the
|
|
676 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
|
|
677 Basics}):
|
|
678
|
|
679 @itemize @bullet
|
|
680 @item
|
|
681 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents
|
|
682 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument
|
|
683 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire
|
|
684 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a
|
|
685 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.}
|
|
686 that begins at the line's left margin.
|
|
687
|
|
688 @item
|
|
689 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra
|
|
690 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a
|
|
691 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1,
|
|
692 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation.
|
|
693 @end itemize
|
|
694
|
|
695 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With
|
|
696 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace
|
|
697 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines
|
|
698 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard
|
|
699 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real
|
|
700 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if
|
|
701 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,, @emacsman{},
|
|
702 @emacsmantitle{}}.
|
|
703
|
|
704 @defopt c-tab-always-indent
|
|
705 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-)
|
|
706 @cindex literal
|
|
707 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates.
|
|
708 @itemize @bullet
|
|
709 @item
|
|
710 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the
|
|
711 current line.
|
|
712 @item
|
|
713 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is
|
|
714 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line.
|
|
715 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of
|
|
716 spaces - see below) at point.
|
|
717 @item
|
|
718 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point
|
|
719 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted.
|
|
720 @end itemize
|
|
721 @end defopt
|
|
722
|
|
723 @defopt c-insert-tab-function
|
|
724 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-)
|
|
725 @findex tab-to-tab-stop
|
|
726 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually
|
|
727 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is
|
|
728 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab
|
|
729 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on
|
|
730 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set
|
|
731 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get
|
|
732 hard tab stops when indenting.
|
|
733 @end defopt
|
|
734 @end table
|
|
735
|
|
736 @noindent
|
|
737 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the
|
|
738 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
|
|
739 Basics}):
|
|
740 @itemize @bullet
|
|
741 @item
|
|
742 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines
|
|
743 according to their syntactic context;
|
|
744 @item
|
|
745 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as
|
|
746 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't
|
|
747 very useful in this case.
|
|
748 @end itemize
|
|
749
|
|
750 @table @asis
|
|
751 @item @kbd{C-j} (@code{newline-and-indent})
|
|
752 @kindex C-j
|
|
753 @findex newline-and-indent
|
|
754 Inserts a newline and indents the new blank line, ready to start
|
|
755 typing. This is a standard (X)Emacs command.
|
|
756
|
|
757 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp})
|
|
758 @kindex C-M-q
|
|
759 @findex c-indent-exp
|
|
760 @findex indent-exp (c-)
|
|
761 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that
|
|
762 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression
|
|
763 you want to indent.
|
|
764
|
|
765 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun})
|
|
766 @kindex C-c C-q
|
|
767 @findex c-indent-defun
|
|
768 @findex indent-defun (c-)
|
|
769 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
|
|
770 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
|
|
771 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
|
|
772 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
|
|
773 must be complete, i.e. it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
|
|
774 brace.
|
|
775
|
|
776 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
|
|
777 @kindex C-M-\
|
|
778 @findex indent-region
|
|
779 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command,
|
|
780 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point
|
|
781 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent.
|
|
782
|
|
783 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function})
|
|
784 @kindex C-M-h
|
|
785 @findex c-mark-function
|
|
786 @findex mark-function (c-)
|
|
787 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking
|
|
788 the current top-level function or class definition as the current
|
|
789 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on
|
|
790 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method.
|
|
791 @end table
|
|
792
|
|
793 These variables are also useful when indenting code:
|
|
794
|
|
795 @defopt indent-tabs-mode
|
|
796 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation
|
|
797 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's
|
|
798 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used.
|
|
799 @end defopt
|
|
800
|
|
801 @defopt c-progress-interval
|
|
802 @vindex progress-interval (c-)
|
|
803 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a
|
|
804 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to
|
|
805 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how
|
|
806 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed.
|
|
807 @end defopt
|
|
808
|
|
809 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
810 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands
|
|
811 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
812 @section Comment Commands
|
|
813 @cindex comments (insertion of)
|
|
814 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
815
|
|
816 @table @asis
|
|
817 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region})
|
|
818 @kindex C-c C-c
|
|
819 @findex comment-region
|
|
820 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a
|
|
821 negative argument, it does the opposite - it deletes the comment
|
|
822 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU
|
|
823 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't
|
|
824 actually part of @ccmode{} - it is given a @ccmode{} binding for
|
|
825 convenience.
|
|
826
|
|
827 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.})
|
|
828 @kindex M-;
|
|
829 @findex comment-dwim
|
|
830 @findex indent-for-comment
|
|
831 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there
|
|
832 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column}
|
|
833 @ifclear XEMACS
|
|
834 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual})
|
|
835 @end ifclear
|
|
836 @ifset XEMACS
|
|
837 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual})
|
|
838 @end ifset
|
|
839 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the
|
|
840 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line,
|
|
841 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs
|
|
842 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables:
|
|
843
|
|
844 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist
|
|
845 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-)
|
|
846 @vindex comment-column
|
|
847 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts
|
|
848 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and
|
|
849 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line.
|
|
850 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to
|
|
851 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type
|
|
852 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column
|
|
853 specified by @code{comment-column}.
|
|
854
|
|
855 See the documentation string for a full description of this
|
|
856 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}).
|
|
857 @end defopt
|
|
858
|
|
859 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
|
|
860 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-)
|
|
861 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will
|
|
862 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
|
|
863 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments.
|
|
864 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only
|
|
865 lines you can get that by setting
|
|
866 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}.
|
|
867
|
|
868 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then
|
|
869 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only
|
|
870 lines.
|
|
871 @end defopt
|
|
872 @end table
|
|
873
|
|
874 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
875 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands
|
|
876 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
877 @section Movement Commands
|
|
878 @cindex movement
|
|
879 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
880
|
|
881 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code.
|
|
882
|
|
883 @table @asis
|
|
884 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun})
|
|
885 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun})
|
|
886 @findex c-beginning-of-defun
|
|
887 @findex c-end-of-defun
|
|
888
|
|
889 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other
|
|
890 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block
|
|
891 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you
|
|
892 can give these commands a repeat count.
|
|
893
|
|
894 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is
|
|
895 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such
|
|
896 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two
|
|
897 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual
|
|
898 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to
|
|
899 move at all.
|
|
900
|
|
901 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands
|
|
902 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they
|
|
903 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun
|
|
904 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{},
|
|
905 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information.
|
|
906
|
|
907 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun})
|
|
908 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun})
|
|
909 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode)
|
|
910 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode)
|
|
911 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun
|
|
912 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-)
|
|
913 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun
|
|
914 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-)
|
|
915 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These
|
|
916 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely
|
|
917 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}.
|
|
918
|
|
919 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which
|
|
920 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and
|
|
921 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some
|
|
922 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode.
|
|
923
|
|
924 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement})
|
|
925 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement})
|
|
926 @kindex M-a
|
|
927 @kindex M-e
|
|
928 @findex c-beginning-of-statement
|
|
929 @findex c-end-of-statement
|
|
930 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-)
|
|
931 @findex end-of-statement (c-)
|
|
932 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point
|
|
933 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement,
|
|
934 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or
|
|
935 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n}
|
|
936 means move over @var{n} statements.
|
|
937
|
|
938 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more
|
|
939 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements.
|
|
940
|
|
941 When called from a program, these functions take three optional
|
|
942 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the
|
|
943 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying
|
|
944 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline
|
|
945 strings.
|
|
946
|
|
947 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional})
|
|
948 @kindex C-c C-u
|
|
949 @findex c-up-conditional
|
|
950 @findex up-conditional (c-)
|
|
951 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
|
|
952 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative
|
|
953 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
|
|
954 conditional.
|
|
955
|
|
956 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
|
|
957 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going
|
|
958 forward.
|
|
959
|
|
960 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
|
|
961 preprocessor statements.
|
|
962
|
|
963 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else}
|
|
964 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else
|
|
965 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-)
|
|
966 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
|
|
967 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
|
|
968
|
|
969 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional}
|
|
970 @findex c-down-conditional
|
|
971 @findex down-conditional (c-)
|
|
972 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving
|
|
973 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
|
|
974 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor
|
|
975 conditional.
|
|
976
|
|
977 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
|
|
978 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward.
|
|
979
|
|
980 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else}
|
|
981 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else
|
|
982 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-)
|
|
983 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
|
|
984 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
|
|
985
|
|
986 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional})
|
|
987 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional})
|
|
988 @kindex C-c C-p
|
|
989 @kindex C-c C-n
|
|
990 @findex c-backward-conditional
|
|
991 @findex c-forward-conditional
|
|
992 @findex backward-conditional (c-)
|
|
993 @findex forward-conditional (c-)
|
|
994 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving
|
|
995 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
|
|
996 negative argument, move in the opposite direction.
|
|
997
|
|
998 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
|
|
999 preprocessor statements.
|
|
1000
|
|
1001 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature}
|
|
1002 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature}
|
|
1003 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature
|
|
1004 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature
|
|
1005 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-)
|
|
1006 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-)
|
|
1007 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
|
|
1008 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
|
|
1009 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
|
|
1010 underscores. E.g. @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
|
|
1011
|
|
1012 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
|
|
1013 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
|
|
1014 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction.
|
|
1015
|
|
1016 Note that these two commands have been superseded by
|
|
1017 @code{c-subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword
|
|
1018 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
|
|
1019 @end table
|
|
1020
|
|
1021 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1022 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands
|
|
1023 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1024 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands
|
|
1025 @cindex text filling
|
|
1026 @cindex line breaking
|
|
1027 @cindex comment handling
|
|
1028 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1029
|
|
1030 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
|
|
1031 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
|
|
1032 is to do it seamlessly, i.e. you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
|
|
1033 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc. wherever
|
|
1034 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
|
|
1035 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
|
|
1036 and so on.
|
|
1037
|
|
1038 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and
|
|
1039 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and
|
|
1040 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have
|
|
1041 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
|
|
1042
|
|
1043 @findex auto-fill-mode
|
|
1044 @cindex Auto Fill mode
|
|
1045 @cindex paragraph filling
|
|
1046 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
|
|
1047 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto Fill,,,
|
|
1048 @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g. with
|
|
1049 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
|
|
1050 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
|
|
1051 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
|
|
1052 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}
|
|
1053 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}.
|
|
1054
|
|
1055 @table @asis
|
|
1056 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph})
|
|
1057 @kindex M-q
|
|
1058 @findex c-fill-paragraph
|
|
1059 @findex fill-paragraph (c-)
|
|
1060 @cindex Javadoc markup
|
|
1061 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
|
|
1062 This command fills multiline string literals and both block
|
|
1063 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words
|
|
1064 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc
|
|
1065 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode.
|
|
1066
|
|
1067 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of
|
|
1068 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if
|
|
1069 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays
|
|
1070 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its
|
|
1071 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line.
|
|
1072
|
|
1073 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{}
|
|
1074 buffers.
|
|
1075
|
|
1076 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line})
|
|
1077 @kindex M-j
|
|
1078 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line
|
|
1079 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-)
|
|
1080 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If
|
|
1081 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line
|
|
1082 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before
|
|
1083 the line break. It is the replacement for
|
|
1084 @code{indent-new-comment-line}.
|
|
1085
|
|
1086 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break}
|
|
1087 @findex c-context-line-break
|
|
1088 @findex context-line-break (c-)
|
|
1089 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a
|
|
1090 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line
|
|
1091 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's
|
|
1092 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts
|
|
1093 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally
|
|
1094 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken.
|
|
1095 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a
|
|
1096 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a
|
|
1097 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are
|
|
1098 valid.}.
|
|
1099
|
|
1100 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be
|
|
1101 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of
|
|
1102 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to
|
|
1103 this function. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
|
|
1104
|
|
1105 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line}
|
|
1106 @findex c-context-open-line
|
|
1107 @findex context-open-line (c-)
|
|
1108 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
|
|
1109 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e. it works just like
|
|
1110 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
|
|
1111 line break.
|
|
1112 @end table
|
|
1113
|
|
1114
|
|
1115 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1116 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands
|
|
1117 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1118 @section Minor Modes
|
|
1119 @cindex Minor Modes
|
|
1120 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1121
|
|
1122 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might
|
|
1123 find useful while writing new code or editing old code:
|
|
1124
|
|
1125 @table @asis
|
|
1126 @item electric mode
|
|
1127 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as
|
|
1128 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when
|
|
1129 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
|
|
1130 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
|
|
1131 @item auto-newline mode
|
|
1132 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
|
|
1133 them yourself, e.g. after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
|
|
1134 when electric mode is disabled.
|
|
1135 @item hungry-delete mode
|
|
1136 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
|
|
1137 key - for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by
|
|
1138 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the
|
|
1139 last statement.
|
|
1140 @item subword mode
|
|
1141 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
|
|
1142 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
|
|
1143 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
|
|
1144 E.g. @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
|
|
1145 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
|
|
1146 @item syntactic-indentation mode
|
|
1147 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
|
|
1148 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic
|
|
1149 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as
|
|
1150 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps
|
|
1151 of `c-basic-offset'.
|
|
1152 @end table
|
|
1153
|
|
1154 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys},
|
|
1155 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement},
|
|
1156 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}.
|
|
1157
|
|
1158 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can
|
|
1159 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favourite
|
|
1160 combination of them (@pxref{Sample .emacs File}). By default, when
|
|
1161 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode
|
|
1162 are enabled but the other two modes are disabled.
|
|
1163
|
|
1164 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor
|
|
1165 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name,
|
|
1166 one letter for each enabled minor mode - @samp{l} for electric mode,
|
|
1167 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and
|
|
1168 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see
|
|
1169 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of
|
|
1170 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}.
|
|
1171
|
|
1172 Here are the commands to toggle these modes:
|
|
1173
|
|
1174 @table @asis
|
|
1175 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state})
|
|
1176 @kindex C-c C-l
|
|
1177 @findex c-toggle-electric-state
|
|
1178 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-)
|
|
1179 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it
|
|
1180 also suppresses auto-newline mode.
|
|
1181
|
|
1182 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline})
|
|
1183 @kindex C-c C-a
|
|
1184 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline
|
|
1185 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-)
|
|
1186 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on,
|
|
1187 it also enables electric minor mode.
|
|
1188
|
|
1189 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.}
|
|
1190 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state
|
|
1191 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-)
|
|
1192 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode.
|
|
1193
|
|
1194 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.}
|
|
1195 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state
|
|
1196 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-)
|
|
1197 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes.
|
|
1198
|
|
1199 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x c-subword-mode})
|
|
1200 @kindex C-c C-w
|
|
1201 @findex c-subword-mode
|
|
1202 @findex subword-mode (c-)
|
|
1203 Toggle subword mode.
|
|
1204
|
|
1205 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation}
|
|
1206 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation
|
|
1207 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-)
|
|
1208 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode.
|
|
1209 @end table
|
|
1210
|
|
1211 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called
|
|
1212 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A
|
|
1213 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the
|
|
1214 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will
|
|
1215 turn it (or them) off.
|
|
1216
|
|
1217
|
|
1218 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1219 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands
|
|
1220 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1221 @section Electric Keys and Keywords
|
|
1222 @cindex electric characters
|
|
1223 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1224
|
|
1225 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior - as well as
|
|
1226 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as
|
|
1227 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to
|
|
1228 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few
|
|
1229 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action.
|
|
1230
|
|
1231 You can inhibit the electric behaviour described here by disabling
|
|
1232 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}).
|
|
1233
|
|
1234 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when
|
|
1235 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string
|
|
1236 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when
|
|
1237 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it
|
|
1238 does by default).
|
|
1239
|
|
1240 These keys and keywords are:
|
|
1241 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more
|
|
1242 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get
|
|
1243 @c fixed in the code sometime.
|
|
1244
|
|
1245 @table @kbd
|
|
1246 @item #
|
|
1247 @kindex #
|
|
1248 @findex c-electric-pound
|
|
1249 @findex electric-pound (c-)
|
|
1250 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior
|
|
1251 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-)
|
|
1252 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the
|
|
1253 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro
|
|
1254 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior}
|
|
1255 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list
|
|
1256 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft},
|
|
1257 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column
|
|
1258 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions.
|
|
1259
|
|
1260 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment,
|
|
1261 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable
|
|
1262 character.
|
|
1263 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment
|
|
1264 @c reindentation.
|
|
1265
|
|
1266 @item *
|
|
1267 @kindex *
|
|
1268 @itemx /
|
|
1269 @kindex /
|
|
1270 @findex c-electric-star
|
|
1271 @findex electric-star (c-)
|
|
1272 @findex c-electric-slash
|
|
1273 @findex electric-slash (c-)
|
|
1274 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
|
|
1275 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
|
|
1276 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
|
|
1277 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
|
|
1278 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e. there's only
|
|
1279 whitespace before it).
|
|
1280
|
|
1281 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
|
|
1282 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the
|
|
1283 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get
|
|
1284 this behaviour. @xref{Clean-ups}.
|
|
1285
|
|
1286 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not
|
|
1287 electric.
|
|
1288
|
|
1289 @item <
|
|
1290 @kindex <
|
|
1291 @itemx >
|
|
1292 @kindex >
|
|
1293 @findex c-electric-lt-gt
|
|
1294 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-)
|
|
1295 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is
|
|
1296 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++
|
|
1297 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other
|
|
1298 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>}
|
|
1299 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line
|
|
1300 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not
|
|
1301 electric.
|
|
1302
|
|
1303 @item (
|
|
1304 @kindex (
|
|
1305 @itemx )
|
|
1306 @kindex )
|
|
1307 @findex c-electric-paren
|
|
1308 @findex electric-paren (c-)
|
|
1309 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to
|
|
1310 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful
|
|
1311 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned
|
|
1312 automatically.
|
|
1313
|
|
1314 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically
|
|
1315 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to
|
|
1316 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument
|
|
1317 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to
|
|
1318 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}.
|
|
1319
|
|
1320 @item @{
|
|
1321 @kindex @{
|
|
1322 @itemx @}
|
|
1323 @kindex @}
|
|
1324 @findex c-electric-brace
|
|
1325 @findex electric-brace (c-)
|
|
1326 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the
|
|
1327 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if
|
|
1328 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
|
|
1329 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace
|
|
1330 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances.
|
|
1331 @xref{Clean-ups}.
|
|
1332
|
|
1333 @item :
|
|
1334 @kindex :
|
|
1335 @findex c-electric-colon
|
|
1336 @findex electric-colon (c-)
|
|
1337 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the
|
|
1338 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if
|
|
1339 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you
|
|
1340 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default
|
|
1341 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope
|
|
1342 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}.
|
|
1343
|
|
1344 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation,
|
|
1345 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups.
|
|
1346 @xref{Other Commands}.
|
|
1347
|
|
1348 @item ;
|
|
1349 @kindex ;
|
|
1350 @itemx ,
|
|
1351 @kindex ,
|
|
1352 @findex c-electric-semi&comma
|
|
1353 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-)
|
|
1354 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma})
|
|
1355 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if
|
|
1356 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
|
|
1357 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline
|
|
1358 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again
|
|
1359 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}.
|
|
1360
|
|
1361 @end table
|
|
1362
|
|
1363 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement
|
|
1364 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-)
|
|
1365
|
|
1366 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are
|
|
1367 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that
|
|
1368 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one:
|
|
1369 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and
|
|
1370 @code{finally} (only in Java).
|
|
1371
|
|
1372 An example:
|
|
1373
|
|
1374 @example
|
|
1375 @group
|
|
1376 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
|
|
1377 if (a[i])
|
|
1378 res += a[i]->offset;
|
|
1379 else
|
|
1380 @end group
|
|
1381 @end example
|
|
1382
|
|
1383 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if},
|
|
1384 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically
|
|
1385 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only
|
|
1386 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a
|
|
1387 continuation of the preceding @code{if}.
|
|
1388
|
|
1389 @vindex abbrev-mode
|
|
1390 @findex abbrev-mode
|
|
1391 @cindex Abbrev mode
|
|
1392 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,, @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}})
|
|
1393 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language
|
|
1394 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements.
|
|
1395 @end deffn
|
|
1396
|
|
1397
|
|
1398 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1399 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands
|
|
1400 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1401 @section Auto-newline Insertion
|
|
1402 @cindex auto-newline
|
|
1403 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1404
|
|
1405 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor
|
|
1406 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain
|
|
1407 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a
|
|
1408 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the
|
|
1409 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both.
|
|
1410
|
|
1411 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
|
|
1412
|
|
1413 @itemize @bullet
|
|
1414 @item
|
|
1415 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
|
|
1416 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g. @samp{C/a} or
|
|
1417 @samp{C/la}).
|
|
1418
|
|
1419 @item
|
|
1420 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace
|
|
1421 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline.
|
|
1422
|
|
1423 @item
|
|
1424 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to
|
|
1425 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.)
|
|
1426
|
|
1427 @item
|
|
1428 @cindex literal
|
|
1429 @cindex syntactic whitespace
|
|
1430 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A
|
|
1431 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro
|
|
1432 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
|
|
1433 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
|
|
1434
|
|
1435 @item
|
|
1436 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e. it was typed as
|
|
1437 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
|
|
1438 @end itemize
|
|
1439
|
|
1440 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get
|
|
1441 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style
|
|
1442 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably
|
|
1443 won't have to bother.
|
|
1444
|
|
1445 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one,
|
|
1446 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}.
|
|
1447 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can
|
|
1448 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess
|
|
1449 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a
|
|
1450 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of
|
|
1451 clean-ups listed by key.
|
|
1452
|
|
1453
|
|
1454 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1455 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands
|
|
1456 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1457 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace
|
|
1458 @cindex hungry-deletion
|
|
1459 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1460
|
|
1461 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
|
|
1462 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
|
|
1463 either before point or after point in a single operation.
|
|
1464 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or
|
|
1465 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the
|
|
1466 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example,
|
|
1467 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed
|
|
1468 @kbd{C-j}.
|
|
1469
|
|
1470 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely
|
|
1471 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all}
|
|
1472 your editing modes!
|
|
1473
|
|
1474 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the
|
|
1475 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete
|
|
1476 key''. This is discussed in more detail below.
|
|
1477
|
|
1478 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion:
|
|
1479
|
|
1480 @table @asis
|
|
1481 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d}
|
|
1482 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x
|
|
1483 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command
|
|
1484 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding
|
|
1485 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This
|
|
1486 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry
|
|
1487 deletion.
|
|
1488
|
|
1489 @table @asis
|
|
1490 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace})
|
|
1491 @kindex DEL
|
|
1492 @findex c-electric-backspace
|
|
1493 @findex electric-backspace (c-)
|
|
1494 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When
|
|
1495 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in
|
|
1496 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix
|
|
1497 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just
|
|
1498 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the
|
|
1499 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function},
|
|
1500 passing it the prefix argument, if any.)
|
|
1501
|
|
1502 @item @code{c-backspace-function}
|
|
1503 @vindex c-backspace-function
|
|
1504 @vindex backspace-function (c-)
|
|
1505 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify
|
|
1506 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't
|
|
1507 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default
|
|
1508 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify}
|
|
1509 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which
|
|
1510 deletes a single character.
|
|
1511
|
|
1512 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward})
|
|
1513 @kindex C-d
|
|
1514 @findex c-electric-delete-forward
|
|
1515 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-)
|
|
1516 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like
|
|
1517 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it
|
|
1518 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it
|
|
1519 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it
|
|
1520 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix
|
|
1521 argument.)
|
|
1522
|
|
1523 @item @code{c-delete-function}
|
|
1524 @vindex c-delete-function
|
|
1525 @vindex delete-function (c-)
|
|
1526 @findex delete-char
|
|
1527 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it
|
|
1528 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The
|
|
1529 default value is @code{delete-char}.
|
|
1530 @end table
|
|
1531
|
|
1532 @item Using Distinct Bindings
|
|
1533 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to
|
|
1534 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and
|
|
1535 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences
|
|
1536 rather than using the minor mode toggling.
|
|
1537
|
|
1538 @table @asis
|
|
1539 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.}
|
|
1540 @kindex C-c C-<backspace>
|
|
1541 @kindex C-c <backspace>
|
|
1542 @kindex C-c C-DEL
|
|
1543 @kindex C-c DEL
|
|
1544 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards
|
|
1545 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-)
|
|
1546 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless
|
|
1547 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
|
|
1548 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more
|
|
1549 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at
|
|
1550 a character terminal.
|
|
1551
|
|
1552 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward})
|
|
1553 @kindex C-c C-d
|
|
1554 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE>
|
|
1555 @kindex C-c <DELETE>
|
|
1556 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward
|
|
1557 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-)
|
|
1558 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless
|
|
1559 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
|
|
1560 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the
|
|
1561 same reason as for @key{DEL} above.
|
|
1562 @end table
|
|
1563 @end table
|
|
1564
|
|
1565 @kindex <delete>
|
|
1566 @kindex <backspace>
|
|
1567
|
|
1568 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we
|
|
1569 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly
|
|
1570 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to
|
|
1571 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using.
|
|
1572
|
|
1573 @findex c-electric-delete
|
|
1574 @findex electric-delete (c-)
|
|
1575 @findex c-hungry-delete
|
|
1576 @findex hungry-delete (c-)
|
|
1577 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward
|
|
1578 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to
|
|
1579 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to
|
|
1580 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by
|
|
1581 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard
|
|
1582 XEmacs variable.
|
|
1583 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...).
|
|
1584 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do
|
|
1585 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it
|
|
1586 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly,
|
|
1587 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to
|
|
1588 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by
|
|
1589 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}.
|
|
1590
|
|
1591 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
|
|
1592
|
|
1593 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and
|
|
1594 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment,
|
|
1595 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}}
|
|
1596 etc. If you need to change the bindings through
|
|
1597 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt
|
|
1598 its extended bindings accordingly.
|
|
1599
|
|
1600 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either
|
|
1601 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes
|
|
1602 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings
|
|
1603 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this
|
|
1604 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable.
|
|
1605
|
|
1606 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can
|
|
1607 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not
|
|
1608 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having
|
|
1609 trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
|
|
1610
|
|
1611
|
|
1612 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1613 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands
|
|
1614 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1615 @section Subword Movement and Editing
|
|
1616 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1617
|
|
1618 @cindex nomenclature
|
|
1619 @cindex subword
|
|
1620 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
|
|
1621 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g. @samp{GtkWidget},
|
|
1622 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
|
|
1623 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
|
|
1624 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
|
|
1625 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples:
|
|
1626
|
|
1627 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}}
|
|
1628 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
|
|
1629 @iftex
|
|
1630 @item @b{Nomenclature}
|
|
1631 @tab @b{Subwords}
|
|
1632 @end iftex
|
|
1633 @ifnottex
|
|
1634 @item Nomenclature
|
|
1635 @tab Subwords
|
|
1636 @item ---------------------------------------------------------
|
|
1637 @end ifnottex
|
|
1638 @item @samp{GtkWindow}
|
|
1639 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window}
|
|
1640 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass}
|
|
1641 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class}
|
|
1642 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext}
|
|
1643 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}
|
|
1644 @end multitable
|
|
1645
|
|
1646 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and
|
|
1647 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a
|
|
1648 nomenclature and treat them as separate words:
|
|
1649
|
|
1650 @findex c-forward-subword
|
|
1651 @findex forward-subword (c-)
|
|
1652 @findex c-backward-subword
|
|
1653 @findex backward-subword (c-)
|
|
1654 @findex c-mark-subword
|
|
1655 @findex mark-subword (c-)
|
|
1656 @findex c-kill-subword
|
|
1657 @findex kill-subword (c-)
|
|
1658 @findex c-backward-kill-subword
|
|
1659 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-)
|
|
1660 @findex c-transpose-subwords
|
|
1661 @findex transpose-subwords (c-)
|
|
1662 @findex c-capitalize-subword
|
|
1663 @findex capitalize-subword (c-)
|
|
1664 @findex c-upcase-subword
|
|
1665 @findex upcase-subword (c-)
|
|
1666 @findex c-downcase-subword
|
|
1667 @findex downcase-subword (c-)
|
|
1668 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40
|
|
1669 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
|
|
1670 @iftex
|
|
1671 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command}
|
|
1672 @end iftex
|
|
1673 @ifnottex
|
|
1674 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command
|
|
1675 @item ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
1676 @end ifnottex
|
|
1677 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword}
|
|
1678 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword}
|
|
1679 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword}
|
|
1680 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword}
|
|
1681 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword}
|
|
1682 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords}
|
|
1683 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword}
|
|
1684 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword}
|
|
1685 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword}
|
|
1686 @end multitable
|
|
1687
|
|
1688 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented
|
|
1689 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have
|
|
1690 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented
|
|
1691 commands.
|
|
1692
|
|
1693 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the
|
|
1694 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your
|
|
1695 @file{.emacs}:
|
|
1696
|
|
1697 @example
|
|
1698 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
|
|
1699 (lambda () (c-subword-mode 1)))
|
|
1700 @end example
|
|
1701
|
|
1702 As a bonus, you can also use @code{c-subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{}
|
|
1703 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x c-subword-mode}.
|
|
1704
|
|
1705 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1706 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands
|
|
1707 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1708 @section Other Commands
|
|
1709 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1710
|
|
1711 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else:
|
|
1712
|
|
1713 @table @asis
|
|
1714 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style})
|
|
1715 @kindex C-c .
|
|
1716 @findex c-set-style
|
|
1717 @findex set-style (c-)
|
|
1718 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this:
|
|
1719
|
|
1720 @example
|
|
1721 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}}
|
|
1722 @end example
|
|
1723
|
|
1724 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the
|
|
1725 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the
|
|
1726 ones you define yourself.
|
|
1727
|
|
1728 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your
|
|
1729 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes,
|
|
1730 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}.
|
|
1731
|
|
1732 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}.
|
|
1733 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator})
|
|
1734 @kindex C-c :
|
|
1735 @findex c-scope-operator
|
|
1736 @findex scope-operator (c-)
|
|
1737 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope
|
|
1738 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion.
|
|
1739 @kbd{C-c :} does just this.
|
|
1740
|
|
1741 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region})
|
|
1742 @kindex C-c C-\
|
|
1743 @findex c-backslash-region
|
|
1744 @findex backslash-region (c-)
|
|
1745 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in
|
|
1746 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros.
|
|
1747
|
|
1748 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns
|
|
1749 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and
|
|
1750 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it
|
|
1751 deletes any backslashes.
|
|
1752
|
|
1753 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If
|
|
1754 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash
|
|
1755 (if any) at the end of the previous line.
|
|
1756
|
|
1757 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}.
|
|
1758 @end table
|
|
1759
|
|
1760 @noindent
|
|
1761 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break}
|
|
1762 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit
|
|
1763 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it
|
|
1764 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end
|
|
1765 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the
|
|
1766 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside
|
|
1767 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother
|
|
1768 with the trailing backslashes.
|
|
1769
|
|
1770 @table @asis
|
|
1771 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand})
|
|
1772 @kindex C-c C-e
|
|
1773 @findex c-macro-expand
|
|
1774 @findex macro-expand (c-)
|
|
1775 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region,
|
|
1776 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it
|
|
1777 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix
|
|
1778 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region
|
|
1779 with the expansion.
|
|
1780
|
|
1781 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key
|
|
1782 sequence is not bound in these other modes.
|
|
1783
|
|
1784 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it
|
|
1785 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up
|
|
1786 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or
|
|
1787 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums.
|
|
1788 @end table
|
|
1789
|
|
1790 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1791 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top
|
|
1792 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1793 @chapter Font Locking
|
|
1794 @cindex font locking
|
|
1795 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1796
|
|
1797 @cindex Font Lock mode
|
|
1798
|
|
1799 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by
|
|
1800 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you
|
|
1801 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments,
|
|
1802 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them
|
|
1803 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font
|
|
1804 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
|
|
1805 @ccmode{} buffers.
|
|
1806
|
|
1807 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
|
|
1808 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
|
|
1809 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK. The other
|
|
1810 sections apply to the other languages.
|
|
1811
|
|
1812 @menu
|
|
1813 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
|
|
1814 * Faces::
|
|
1815 * Doc Comments::
|
|
1816 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
|
|
1817 @end menu
|
|
1818
|
|
1819
|
|
1820 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1821 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking
|
|
1822 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1823 @section Font Locking Preliminaries
|
|
1824 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1825
|
|
1826 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided
|
|
1827 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}.
|
|
1828 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked
|
|
1829 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK
|
|
1830 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has
|
|
1831 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages
|
|
1832 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means
|
|
1833 that it's a bit different in most languages now.
|
|
1834
|
|
1835 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide
|
|
1836 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
|
|
1837 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like
|
|
1838 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great
|
|
1839 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
|
|
1840 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
|
|
1841 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
|
|
1842 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
|
|
1843 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,,
|
|
1844 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}).
|
|
1845
|
|
1846 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration
|
|
1847
|
|
1848 The decoration levels are used as follows:
|
|
1849
|
|
1850 @enumerate
|
|
1851 @comment 1
|
|
1852 @item
|
|
1853 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor
|
|
1854 directives (in the languages that use cpp).
|
|
1855
|
|
1856 @comment 2
|
|
1857 @item
|
|
1858 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple
|
|
1859 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables
|
|
1860 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the
|
|
1861 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation
|
|
1862 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to
|
|
1863 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}).
|
|
1864
|
|
1865 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest
|
|
1866 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns.
|
|
1867
|
|
1868 @comment 3
|
|
1869 @item
|
|
1870 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that
|
|
1871 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The
|
|
1872 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user
|
|
1873 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore
|
|
1874 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns
|
|
1875 that are uncertain.
|
|
1876
|
|
1877 @cindex Lazy Lock mode
|
|
1878 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode
|
|
1879
|
|
1880 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock
|
|
1881 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only
|
|
1882 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole
|
|
1883 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary
|
|
1884 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
|
|
1885 @end enumerate
|
|
1886
|
|
1887 @cindex user defined types
|
|
1888 @cindex types, user defined
|
|
1889
|
|
1890 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide
|
|
1891 additional regexps to match those you use:
|
|
1892
|
|
1893 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types
|
|
1894 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types
|
|
1895 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types
|
|
1896 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types
|
|
1897 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types
|
|
1898 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types
|
|
1899 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
|
|
1900 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
|
|
1901 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
|
|
1902 e.g. @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
|
|
1903 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
|
|
1904 single identifier.
|
|
1905
|
|
1906 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime
|
|
1907 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for
|
|
1908 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++.
|
|
1909 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names
|
|
1910 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages.
|
|
1911
|
|
1912 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for
|
|
1913 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to
|
|
1914 recognize types.
|
|
1915 @end defopt
|
|
1916
|
|
1917
|
|
1918 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1919 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking
|
|
1920 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
1921 @section Faces
|
|
1922 @cindex faces
|
|
1923 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
1924
|
|
1925 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages
|
|
1926 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra
|
|
1927 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face
|
|
1928 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide
|
|
1929 @code{font-lock-warning-face}.
|
|
1930
|
|
1931 @itemize @bullet
|
|
1932 @item
|
|
1933 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
|
|
1934 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}.
|
|
1935
|
|
1936 @item
|
|
1937 @vindex font-lock-doc-face
|
|
1938 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face
|
|
1939 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
|
|
1940 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments})
|
|
1941 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or
|
|
1942 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If
|
|
1943 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used.
|
|
1944
|
|
1945 @item
|
|
1946 @vindex font-lock-string-face
|
|
1947 String and character literals are fontified in
|
|
1948 @code{font-lock-string-face}.
|
|
1949
|
|
1950 @item
|
|
1951 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face
|
|
1952 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}.
|
|
1953
|
|
1954 @item
|
|
1955 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face
|
|
1956 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in
|
|
1957 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also
|
|
1958 used for preprocessor defines with arguments.
|
|
1959
|
|
1960 @item
|
|
1961 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face
|
|
1962 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such
|
|
1963 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also
|
|
1964 used for preprocessor defines without arguments.
|
|
1965
|
|
1966 @item
|
|
1967 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
|
|
1968 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
|
|
1969 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it
|
|
1970 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the
|
|
1971 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's
|
|
1972 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in
|
|
1973 them somewhere.
|
|
1974
|
|
1975 @item
|
|
1976 @vindex font-lock-type-face
|
|
1977 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user
|
|
1978 defined) and classes in type contexts.
|
|
1979
|
|
1980 @item
|
|
1981 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
|
|
1982 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
|
|
1983 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists,
|
|
1984 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise.
|
|
1985
|
|
1986 @item
|
|
1987 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like
|
|
1988 labels.
|
|
1989
|
|
1990 @item
|
|
1991 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like
|
|
1992 labels.
|
|
1993
|
|
1994 @item
|
|
1995 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face
|
|
1996 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face
|
|
1997 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
|
|
1998 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
|
|
1999 exists (i.e. XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
|
|
2000 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
|
|
2001
|
|
2002 @item
|
|
2003 @vindex font-lock-warning-face
|
|
2004 @vindex c-invalid-face
|
|
2005 @vindex invalid-face (c-)
|
|
2006 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with
|
|
2007 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions
|
|
2008 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special
|
|
2009 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by
|
|
2010 default.
|
|
2011
|
|
2012 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives,
|
|
2013 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
|
|
2014 @end itemize
|
|
2015
|
|
2016
|
|
2017 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2018 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking
|
|
2019 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2020 @section Documentation Comments
|
|
2021 @cindex documentation comments
|
|
2022 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2023
|
|
2024 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
|
|
2025 specially structured comments, e.g. the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
|
|
2026 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
|
|
2027 the special markup inside them.
|
|
2028
|
|
2029 @defopt c-doc-comment-style
|
|
2030 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
|
|
2031 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
|
|
2032 style to recognize, e.g. @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
|
|
2033
|
|
2034 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
|
|
2035 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
|
|
2036 conflict).
|
|
2037
|
|
2038 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment
|
|
2039 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then
|
|
2040 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as
|
|
2041 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol `other' is looked up
|
|
2042 and its value is used instead.
|
|
2043
|
|
2044 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
|
|
2045 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}.
|
|
2046
|
|
2047 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
|
|
2048 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
|
|
2049 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
|
|
2050 in some other way, e.g. interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
|
|
2051 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
|
|
2052 reinitialize.
|
|
2053
|
|
2054 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style
|
|
2055 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-)
|
|
2056 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are
|
|
2057 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in
|
|
2058 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style}
|
|
2059 afterwards to redo that work.
|
|
2060 @end defopt
|
|
2061
|
|
2062 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment
|
|
2063 styles:
|
|
2064
|
|
2065 @table @code
|
|
2066 @item javadoc
|
|
2067 @cindex Javadoc markup
|
|
2068 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java.
|
|
2069
|
|
2070 @item autodoc
|
|
2071 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
|
|
2072 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike.
|
|
2073
|
|
2074 @item gtkdoc
|
|
2075 @cindex GtkDoc markup
|
|
2076 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community.
|
|
2077 @end table
|
|
2078
|
|
2079 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for
|
|
2080 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and
|
|
2081 Bug Reports}).
|
|
2082
|
|
2083 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use
|
|
2084 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function
|
|
2085 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use
|
|
2086 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to
|
|
2087 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode
|
|
2088 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see
|
|
2089 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}.
|
|
2090
|
|
2091 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider
|
|
2092 contributing it - send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
|
|
2093
|
|
2094
|
|
2095 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2096 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking
|
|
2097 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2098 @section AWK Mode Font Locking
|
|
2099 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2100
|
|
2101 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any
|
|
2102 other programming mode. @xref{Faces For Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs
|
|
2103 Lisp Reference Manual}.
|
|
2104
|
|
2105 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in
|
|
2106 AWK mode:
|
|
2107
|
|
2108 @table @asis
|
|
2109 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}
|
|
2110 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are
|
|
2111 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system
|
|
2112 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as
|
|
2113 @code{"/dev/stderr"}).
|
|
2114
|
|
2115 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs)
|
|
2116 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}.
|
|
2117 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for
|
|
2118 standard functions (such as @code{match}).
|
|
2119
|
|
2120 @item @code{font-lock-string-face}
|
|
2121 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings,
|
|
2122 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK
|
|
2123 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}).
|
|
2124
|
|
2125 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs)
|
|
2126 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK
|
|
2127 constructs:
|
|
2128
|
|
2129 @itemize @bullet
|
|
2130 @item
|
|
2131 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening
|
|
2132 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in
|
|
2133 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a
|
|
2134 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face
|
|
2135 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct.
|
|
2136
|
|
2137 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions
|
|
2138 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line
|
|
2139 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly),
|
|
2140 rather than the text up to the next string quote.
|
|
2141
|
|
2142 @item
|
|
2143 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling
|
|
2144 a user function. The last character of the function name and the
|
|
2145 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will
|
|
2146 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an
|
|
2147 identifier precedes a parenthesised expression. Unfortunately.
|
|
2148
|
|
2149 @item
|
|
2150 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an
|
|
2151 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted.
|
|
2152 @end itemize
|
|
2153 @end table
|
|
2154
|
|
2155
|
|
2156 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2157 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top
|
|
2158 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2159 @chapter Configuration Basics
|
|
2160 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2161
|
|
2162 @cindex Emacs Initialization File
|
|
2163 @cindex Configuration
|
|
2164 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and
|
|
2165 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't
|
|
2166 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs
|
|
2167 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or
|
|
2168 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some
|
|
2169 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For
|
|
2170 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}''
|
|
2171 throughout the rest of the manual.
|
|
2172
|
|
2173 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as
|
|
2174 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known
|
|
2175 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group,
|
|
2176 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style
|
|
2177 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and
|
|
2178 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}.
|
|
2179
|
|
2180 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the
|
|
2181 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page.
|
|
2182 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest
|
|
2183 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''.
|
|
2184
|
|
2185 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way
|
|
2186 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list:
|
|
2187 @itemize @asis
|
|
2188 @item
|
|
2189 @table @asis
|
|
2190 @item Style
|
|
2191 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface''
|
|
2192 @itemx Hook
|
|
2193 @itemx File Style
|
|
2194 @end table
|
|
2195 @end itemize
|
|
2196
|
|
2197 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration
|
|
2198 settings:
|
|
2199
|
|
2200 @table @asis
|
|
2201 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface''
|
|
2202 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top
|
|
2203 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer,
|
|
2204 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least,
|
|
2205 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to
|
|
2206 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first
|
|
2207 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read}
|
|
2208 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For
|
|
2209 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus:
|
|
2210
|
|
2211 @example
|
|
2212 (setq c-basic-offset 4)
|
|
2213 @end example
|
|
2214
|
|
2215 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead,
|
|
2216 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this,
|
|
2217 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}.
|
|
2218 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
|
|
2219 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual.
|
|
2220 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your
|
|
2221 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit
|
|
2222 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after}
|
|
2223 the customizations.
|
|
2224
|
|
2225 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the
|
|
2226 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}.
|
|
2227 @xref{Built-in Styles}.
|
|
2228
|
|
2229 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is
|
|
2230 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{}
|
|
2231 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers.
|
|
2232 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s
|
|
2233 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles.
|
|
2234
|
|
2235 @item Hooks
|
|
2236 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want
|
|
2237 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances.
|
|
2238 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main
|
|
2239 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports - any
|
|
2240 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a
|
|
2241 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization
|
|
2242 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the
|
|
2243 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you
|
|
2244 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C
|
|
2245 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this:
|
|
2246
|
|
2247 @example
|
|
2248 @group
|
|
2249 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
|
|
2250 (setq c-basic-offset 3))
|
|
2251 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
|
|
2252
|
|
2253 (defun my-java-mode-hook ()
|
|
2254 (setq c-basic-offset 6))
|
|
2255 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook)
|
|
2256 @end group
|
|
2257 @end example
|
|
2258
|
|
2259 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks.
|
|
2260
|
|
2261 @item Styles
|
|
2262 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations
|
|
2263 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each
|
|
2264 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default.
|
|
2265 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally,
|
|
2266 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing
|
|
2267 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free
|
|
2268 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this
|
|
2269 in your @file{.emacs} file:
|
|
2270
|
|
2271 @example
|
|
2272 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
|
|
2273 (awk-mode . "awk")
|
|
2274 (other . "free-group-style")))
|
|
2275 @end example
|
|
2276
|
|
2277 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how
|
|
2278 to create them.
|
|
2279
|
|
2280 @item File Styles
|
|
2281 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism
|
|
2282 described above, which applies to an individual source file. To use
|
|
2283 it, you set certain Emacs local variables in a special block at the
|
|
2284 end of the source file. @xref{File Styles}.
|
|
2285
|
|
2286 @item Hooks with Styles
|
|
2287 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For
|
|
2288 example, if your team were developing a product which required a
|
|
2289 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the
|
|
2290 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You
|
|
2291 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}:
|
|
2292
|
|
2293 @example
|
|
2294 @group
|
|
2295 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
|
|
2296 (c-set-style
|
|
2297 (if (and (buffer-file-name)
|
|
2298 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name)))
|
|
2299 "linux"
|
|
2300 "free-group-style")))
|
|
2301 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
|
|
2302 @end group
|
|
2303 @end example
|
|
2304
|
|
2305 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member
|
|
2306 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the
|
|
2307 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could
|
|
2308 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
|
|
2309 @file{.emacs}:
|
|
2310
|
|
2311 @example
|
|
2312 @group
|
|
2313 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline ()
|
|
2314 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
|
|
2315 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline)
|
|
2316 @end group
|
|
2317 @end example
|
|
2318 @end table
|
|
2319
|
|
2320 @menu
|
|
2321 * CC Hooks::
|
|
2322 * Style Variables::
|
|
2323 * Styles::
|
|
2324 @end menu
|
|
2325
|
|
2326 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2327 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics
|
|
2328 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2329 @section Hooks
|
|
2330 @cindex mode hooks
|
|
2331 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2332 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
|
|
2333 @c some older versions of Info, e.g. the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
|
|
2334 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
|
|
2335 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
|
|
2336 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
|
|
2337 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note:
|
|
2338 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node.
|
|
2339
|
|
2340 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the
|
|
2341 mode for your coding style. The main hook is
|
|
2342 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your
|
|
2343 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own
|
|
2344 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the
|
|
2345 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization
|
|
2346 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables
|
|
2347 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in
|
|
2348 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the
|
|
2349 standard Emacs conventions.
|
|
2350
|
|
2351 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the
|
|
2352 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls
|
|
2353 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific
|
|
2354 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override
|
|
2355 those set by @code{c-default-style}.
|
|
2356
|
|
2357 @defvar c-initialization-hook
|
|
2358 @vindex initialization-hook (c-)
|
|
2359 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized.
|
|
2360 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any
|
|
2361 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
|
|
2362 @end defvar
|
|
2363
|
|
2364 @defvar c-mode-common-hook
|
|
2365 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-)
|
|
2366 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the
|
|
2367 language specific hook.
|
|
2368 @end defvar
|
|
2369
|
|
2370 @defvar c-mode-hook
|
|
2371 @defvarx c++-mode-hook
|
|
2372 @defvarx objc-mode-hook
|
|
2373 @defvarx java-mode-hook
|
|
2374 @defvarx idl-mode-hook
|
|
2375 @defvarx pike-mode-hook
|
|
2376 @defvarx awk-mode-hook
|
|
2377 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the
|
|
2378 last thing when you enter that language mode.
|
|
2379 @end defvar
|
|
2380
|
|
2381 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give
|
|
2382 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the
|
|
2383 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't
|
|
2384 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded.
|
|
2385
|
|
2386 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs}
|
|
2387 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the
|
|
2388 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks.
|
|
2389 @xref{Sample .emacs File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs}
|
|
2390 file.
|
|
2391
|
|
2392 @example
|
|
2393 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
|
|
2394 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes
|
|
2395 (no-case-fold-search)
|
|
2396 )
|
|
2397 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
|
|
2398 @end example
|
|
2399
|
|
2400 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2401 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics
|
|
2402 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2403 @section Style Variables
|
|
2404 @cindex styles
|
|
2405 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2406
|
|
2407 @cindex style variables
|
|
2408 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
|
|
2409 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
|
|
2410 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
|
|
2411 values at any time (e.g. in a hook function). The style system can
|
|
2412 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
|
|
2413
|
|
2414 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
|
|
2415
|
|
2416 @itemize @bullet
|
|
2417 @item
|
|
2418 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they
|
|
2419 can instead be made global by setting
|
|
2420 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is
|
|
2421 initialized.
|
|
2422
|
|
2423 @item
|
|
2424 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior
|
|
2425 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-)
|
|
2426 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions
|
|
2427 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the
|
|
2428 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a
|
|
2429 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it
|
|
2430 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its
|
|
2431 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of
|
|
2432 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden
|
|
2433 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was
|
|
2434 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to
|
|
2435 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding
|
|
2436 behavior, you can set the variable
|
|
2437 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This
|
|
2438 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with
|
|
2439 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config
|
|
2440 Basics}).
|
|
2441
|
|
2442 @item
|
|
2443 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is
|
|
2444 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's
|
|
2445 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's
|
|
2446 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than
|
|
2447 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you
|
|
2448 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling
|
|
2449 @code{c-set-offset}(@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set
|
|
2450 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then
|
|
2451 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of
|
|
2452 @code{c-offsets-alist}.
|
|
2453
|
|
2454 @item
|
|
2455 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a
|
|
2456 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove
|
|
2457 them, so any global settings you put on it are always
|
|
2458 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value
|
|
2459 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function
|
|
2460 or a list of functions.
|
|
2461
|
|
2462 @item
|
|
2463 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special
|
|
2464 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized.
|
|
2465 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details.
|
|
2466 @end itemize
|
|
2467
|
|
2468 The style variables are:@*
|
|
2469 @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
|
|
2470 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation
|
|
2471 Commands});@*
|
|
2472 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@*
|
|
2473 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp}
|
|
2474 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@*
|
|
2475 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@*
|
|
2476 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@*
|
|
2477 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and
|
|
2478 Commas});@*
|
|
2479 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@*
|
|
2480 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@*
|
|
2481 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@*
|
|
2482 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@*
|
|
2483 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation}
|
|
2484 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@*
|
|
2485 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column}
|
|
2486 (@pxref{Custom Macros}).
|
|
2487
|
|
2488 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2489 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics
|
|
2490 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2491 @section Styles
|
|
2492 @cindex styles
|
|
2493 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2494
|
|
2495 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many
|
|
2496 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets
|
|
2497 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct
|
|
2498 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line.
|
|
2499
|
|
2500 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined
|
|
2501 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a
|
|
2502 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly,
|
|
2503 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style.
|
|
2504 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as
|
|
2505 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For
|
|
2506 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical
|
|
2507 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name
|
|
2508 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or
|
|
2509 existing code using these styles.
|
|
2510
|
|
2511 @menu
|
|
2512 * Built-in Styles::
|
|
2513 * Choosing a Style::
|
|
2514 * Adding Styles::
|
|
2515 * File Styles::
|
|
2516 @end menu
|
|
2517
|
|
2518
|
|
2519 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2520 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles
|
|
2521 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2522 @subsection Built-in Styles
|
|
2523 @cindex styles, built-in
|
|
2524 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2525
|
|
2526 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just
|
|
2527 what you're looking for. These are:
|
|
2528
|
|
2529 @table @code
|
|
2530 @item gnu
|
|
2531 @cindex GNU style
|
|
2532 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation
|
|
2533 for C code in GNU programs.
|
|
2534
|
|
2535 @item k&r
|
|
2536 @cindex K&R style
|
|
2537 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code.
|
|
2538
|
|
2539 @item bsd
|
|
2540 @cindex BSD style
|
|
2541 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman.
|
|
2542
|
|
2543 @item whitesmith
|
|
2544 @cindex Whitesmith style
|
|
2545 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early
|
|
2546 commercial C compiler.
|
|
2547
|
|
2548 @item stroustrup
|
|
2549 @cindex Stroustrup style
|
|
2550 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code.
|
|
2551
|
|
2552 @item ellemtel
|
|
2553 @cindex Ellemtel style
|
|
2554 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules
|
|
2555 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson,
|
|
2556 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at
|
|
2557 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other
|
|
2558 places.}.
|
|
2559 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM).
|
|
2560
|
|
2561 @item linux
|
|
2562 @cindex Linux style
|
|
2563 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel).
|
|
2564
|
|
2565 @item python
|
|
2566 @cindex Python style
|
|
2567 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a
|
|
2568 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface.
|
|
2569 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}.
|
|
2570
|
|
2571 @item java
|
|
2572 @cindex Java style
|
|
2573 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default
|
|
2574 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
|
|
2575 @code{java-mode}.
|
|
2576
|
|
2577 @item awk
|
|
2578 @cindex AWK style
|
|
2579 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for
|
|
2580 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
|
|
2581 @code{awk-mode}.
|
|
2582
|
|
2583 @item user
|
|
2584 @cindex User style
|
|
2585 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory
|
|
2586 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations
|
|
2587 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing
|
|
2588 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your
|
|
2589 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates
|
|
2590 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it
|
|
2591 afterwards.
|
|
2592 @end table
|
|
2593
|
|
2594
|
|
2595 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2596 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles
|
|
2597 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2598 @subsection Choosing a Style
|
|
2599 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2600
|
|
2601 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from
|
|
2602 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu},
|
|
2603 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}.
|
|
2604
|
|
2605 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization
|
|
2606 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the
|
|
2607 style system is initialised (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will
|
|
2608 override the one that the style system would have given the variable.
|
|
2609
|
|
2610 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .}
|
|
2611 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable
|
|
2612 list, @ref{File Styles}.
|
|
2613
|
|
2614 @defopt c-default-style
|
|
2615 @vindex default-style (c-)
|
|
2616 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new
|
|
2617 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list
|
|
2618 of major mode symbols to style names:
|
|
2619
|
|
2620 @enumerate
|
|
2621 @item
|
|
2622 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style
|
|
2623 name. This style is then used for all modes.
|
|
2624
|
|
2625 @item
|
|
2626 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language
|
|
2627 is looked up to find a style name string.
|
|
2628
|
|
2629 @item
|
|
2630 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode
|
|
2631 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is
|
|
2632 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used.
|
|
2633
|
|
2634 @item
|
|
2635 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used.
|
|
2636 @end enumerate
|
|
2637
|
|
2638 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed
|
|
2639 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override
|
|
2640 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your
|
|
2641 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}.
|
|
2642
|
|
2643 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode
|
|
2644 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}.
|
|
2645 @end defopt
|
|
2646
|
|
2647 @defvar c-indentation-style
|
|
2648 @vindex indentation-style (c-)
|
|
2649 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a
|
|
2650 string.
|
|
2651 @end defvar
|
|
2652
|
|
2653
|
|
2654 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2655 @node Adding Styles, File Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles
|
|
2656 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2657 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles
|
|
2658 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2659
|
|
2660 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to
|
|
2661 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing
|
|
2662 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the
|
|
2663 following format - the list can then be passed as an argument to the
|
|
2664 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style
|
|
2665 definition in @ref{Sample .emacs File}.
|
|
2666
|
|
2667 @cindex style definition
|
|
2668 @c @defvr {List} style definition
|
|
2669 @table @asis
|
|
2670 @item Structure of a Style Definition List
|
|
2671 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}])
|
|
2672
|
|
2673 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the
|
|
2674 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most
|
|
2675 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If
|
|
2676 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table
|
|
2677 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in
|
|
2678 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually
|
|
2679 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The
|
|
2680 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}.
|
|
2681
|
|
2682 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a
|
|
2683 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later
|
|
2684 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value
|
|
2685 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of
|
|
2686 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system
|
|
2687 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a
|
|
2688 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the
|
|
2689 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style
|
|
2690 system.
|
|
2691 @c @end defvr
|
|
2692
|
|
2693 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list:
|
|
2694
|
|
2695 @table @code
|
|
2696 @item c-offsets-alist
|
|
2697 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form
|
|
2698
|
|
2699 @example
|
|
2700 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}})
|
|
2701 @end example
|
|
2702
|
|
2703 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to
|
|
2704 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol
|
|
2705 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style.
|
|
2706
|
|
2707 @item c-special-indent-hook
|
|
2708 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using
|
|
2709 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value
|
|
2710 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}.
|
|
2711 @end table
|
|
2712 @end table
|
|
2713
|
|
2714 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you
|
|
2715 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{}
|
|
2716 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose.
|
|
2717
|
|
2718 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p
|
|
2719 @findex add-style (c-)
|
|
2720 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string.
|
|
2721 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described
|
|
2722 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then
|
|
2723 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is
|
|
2724 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.)
|
|
2725 Otherwise, a new style is added.
|
|
2726
|
|
2727 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is
|
|
2728 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is
|
|
2729 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release.
|
|
2730 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead.
|
|
2731
|
|
2732 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new
|
|
2733 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
|
|
2734 @end defun
|
|
2735
|
|
2736 @defvar c-style-alist
|
|
2737 @vindex style-alist (c-)
|
|
2738 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It
|
|
2739 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead.
|
|
2740 @end defvar
|
|
2741
|
|
2742
|
|
2743 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2744 @node File Styles, , Adding Styles, Styles
|
|
2745 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2746 @subsection File Styles
|
|
2747 @cindex styles, file local
|
|
2748 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2749
|
|
2750 @cindex file local variables
|
|
2751
|
|
2752 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a
|
|
2753 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end
|
|
2754 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files, @emacsman{},
|
|
2755 @emacsmantitle{}}).
|
|
2756
|
|
2757 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in
|
|
2758 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by
|
|
2759 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list.
|
|
2760 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style
|
|
2761 on a per-file basis:
|
|
2762
|
|
2763 @defvar c-file-style
|
|
2764 @vindex file-style (c-)
|
|
2765 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list.
|
|
2766 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set
|
|
2767 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}.
|
|
2768 @end defvar
|
|
2769
|
|
2770 @defvar c-file-offsets
|
|
2771 @vindex file-offsets (c-)
|
|
2772 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list
|
|
2773 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you
|
|
2774 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
|
|
2775 using @code{c-set-offset}.
|
|
2776 @end defvar
|
|
2777
|
|
2778 Note that file style settings (i.e. @code{c-file-style}) are applied
|
|
2779 before file offset settings
|
|
2780 (i.e. @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
|
|
2781 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
|
|
2782 made local to that buffer, even if
|
|
2783 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
|
|
2784 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to
|
|
2785 notice this effect.}.
|
|
2786
|
|
2787 If you set any variables, including style variables, by the file local
|
|
2788 variables mechanism, these settings take priority over all other
|
|
2789 settings, even those in your mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). If you
|
|
2790 use @code{c-file-style} or @code{c-file-offsets} and also explicitly
|
|
2791 set a style variable in a local variable block, the explicit setting
|
|
2792 will take priority.
|
|
2793
|
|
2794 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2795 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top
|
|
2796 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
2797 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking
|
|
2798 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
2799
|
|
2800 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
|
|
2801 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does
|
|
2802 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning
|
|
2803 relevant variables as necessary.
|
|
2804
|
|
2805 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp
|
|
2806 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
|
|
2807 @cindex comment line prefix
|
|
2808 @vindex comment-start
|
|
2809 @vindex comment-end
|
|
2810 @vindex comment-start-skip
|
|
2811 @vindex paragraph-start
|
|
2812 @vindex paragraph-separate
|
|
2813 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix
|
|
2814 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
|
|
2815 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp
|
|
2816 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
|
|
2817 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal
|
|
2818 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard
|
|
2819 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end},
|
|
2820 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start},
|
|
2821 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix},
|
|
2822 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and
|
|
2823 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them
|
|
2824 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix.
|
|
2825
|
|
2826 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp
|
|
2827 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
|
|
2828 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the
|
|
2829 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts
|
|
2830 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line
|
|
2831 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different
|
|
2832 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is
|
|
2833 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it
|
|
2834 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead.
|
|
2835
|
|
2836 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{}
|
|
2837 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighbouring line at the start
|
|
2838 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is
|
|
2839 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like
|
|
2840
|
|
2841 @example
|
|
2842 // blah blah
|
|
2843 @end example
|
|
2844
|
|
2845 @noindent
|
|
2846 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and
|
|
2847 subsequent lines of C style block comments like
|
|
2848
|
|
2849 @example
|
|
2850 @group
|
|
2851 /*
|
|
2852 * blah blah
|
|
2853 */
|
|
2854 @end group
|
|
2855 @end example
|
|
2856
|
|
2857 @noindent
|
|
2858 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
|
|
2859 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
|
|
2860 (i.e. @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
|
|
2861 block comments.
|
|
2862
|
|
2863 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
|
|
2864 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-)
|
|
2865 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of
|
|
2866 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at
|
|
2867 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it
|
|
2868 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command
|
|
2869 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other
|
|
2870 variables. That's also the case if you modify
|
|
2871 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will
|
|
2872 already have set up these variables before calling the hook.
|
|
2873 @end defopt
|
|
2874
|
|
2875 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt
|
|
2876 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
|
|
2877
|
|
2878 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
|
|
2879 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode
|
|
2880 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
|
|
2881 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
|
|
2882 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
|
|
2883 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g. in the
|
|
2884 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
|
|
2885 margins of the texts kept intact:
|
|
2886
|
|
2887 @example
|
|
2888 @group
|
|
2889 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming
|
|
2890 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E.
|
|
2891 * Knuth,
|
|
2892 *
|
|
2893 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only
|
|
2894 * proved it correct, not tried it.
|
|
2895 */
|
|
2896 @end group
|
|
2897 @end example
|
|
2898
|
|
2899 @findex c-setup-filladapt
|
|
2900 @findex setup-filladapt (c-)
|
|
2901 @findex filladapt-mode
|
|
2902 @vindex filladapt-mode
|
|
2903 @cindex Filladapt mode
|
|
2904 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle
|
|
2905 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from
|
|
2906 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however
|
|
2907 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when
|
|
2908 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does
|
|
2909 by default). A patch for that is available from
|
|
2910 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.},
|
|
2911 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
|
|
2912 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
|
|
2913 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
|
|
2914 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g. with
|
|
2915 something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
|
|
2916
|
|
2917 @example
|
|
2918 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
|
|
2919 (c-setup-filladapt)
|
|
2920 (filladapt-mode 1))
|
|
2921 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
|
|
2922 @end example
|
|
2923
|
|
2924 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix
|
|
2925 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-)
|
|
2926 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars
|
|
2927 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-)
|
|
2928 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a
|
|
2929 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one
|
|
2930 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like,
|
|
2931 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style
|
|
2932 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called
|
|
2933 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure,
|
|
2934 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used
|
|
2935 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
|
|
2936 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of
|
|
2937 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
|
|
2938 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
|
|
2939 splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
|
|
2940 e.g. @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
|
|
2941
|
|
2942 @example
|
|
2943 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
|
|
2944 @end example
|
|
2945
|
|
2946 @noindent
|
|
2947 break into
|
|
2948
|
|
2949 @example
|
|
2950 @group
|
|
2951 /* Got O(n^2) here, which
|
|
2952 * is a Bad Thing. */
|
|
2953 @end group
|
|
2954 @end example
|
|
2955
|
|
2956 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading
|
|
2957 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the
|
|
2958 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to
|
|
2959 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It
|
|
2960 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of
|
|
2961 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
|
|
2962 @end defopt
|
|
2963
|
|
2964 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
|
|
2965 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
|
|
2966 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
|
|
2967 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g. to never
|
|
2968 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
|
|
2969 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
|
|
2970 never should occur:
|
|
2971
|
|
2972 @table @code
|
|
2973 @item string
|
|
2974 Inside a string or character literal.
|
|
2975 @item c
|
|
2976 Inside a C style block comment.
|
|
2977 @item c++
|
|
2978 Inside a C++ style line comment.
|
|
2979 @item cpp
|
|
2980 Inside a preprocessor directive.
|
|
2981 @item code
|
|
2982 Anywhere else, i.e. in normal code.
|
|
2983 @end table
|
|
2984
|
|
2985 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
|
|
2986 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated,
|
|
2987 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often
|
|
2988 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor
|
|
2989 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline
|
|
2990 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would
|
|
2991 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally
|
|
2992 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last
|
|
2993 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor
|
|
2994 results in the current implementation.
|
|
2995 @end defopt
|
|
2996
|
|
2997 @vindex comment-multi-line
|
|
2998 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto Fill,,,
|
|
2999 @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the indentation and
|
|
3000 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and
|
|
3001 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same
|
|
3002 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for
|
|
3003 comments.
|
|
3004
|
|
3005 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
|
|
3006 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
|
|
3007 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
|
|
3008 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
|
|
3009 (e.g. @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
|
|
3010 inconsistent behavior.
|
|
3011
|
|
3012 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3013 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top
|
|
3014 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3015 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines
|
|
3016 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3017
|
|
3018 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically
|
|
3019 different ways, depending on the character just typed:
|
|
3020
|
|
3021 @table @asis
|
|
3022 @item Braces and Colons
|
|
3023 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon
|
|
3024 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in
|
|
3025 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines - this is any
|
|
3026 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist
|
|
3027 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace,
|
|
3028 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and
|
|
3029 @ref{Hanging Colons}.
|
|
3030
|
|
3031 @item Semicolons and Commas
|
|
3032 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of
|
|
3033 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly
|
|
3034 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}.
|
|
3035 @end table
|
|
3036
|
|
3037 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging}
|
|
3038 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character
|
|
3039 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when
|
|
3040 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a
|
|
3041 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in:
|
|
3042
|
|
3043 @example
|
|
3044 @group
|
|
3045 while (i < MAX) @{
|
|
3046 total += entry[i];
|
|
3047 entry [i++] = 0;
|
|
3048 @}
|
|
3049 @end group
|
|
3050 @end example
|
|
3051
|
|
3052 @noindent
|
|
3053 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of
|
|
3054 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing
|
|
3055 brace.
|
|
3056
|
|
3057 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{}
|
|
3058 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific
|
|
3059 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}.
|
|
3060
|
|
3061 @menu
|
|
3062 * Hanging Braces::
|
|
3063 * Hanging Colons::
|
|
3064 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
|
|
3065 @end menu
|
|
3066
|
|
3067
|
|
3068 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3069 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines
|
|
3070 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3071 @section Hanging Braces
|
|
3072 @cindex hanging braces
|
|
3073 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3074
|
|
3075 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around,
|
|
3076 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its
|
|
3077 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how
|
|
3078 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given
|
|
3079 in @ref{Style Variables}.
|
|
3080
|
|
3081 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following
|
|
3082 @samp{@{}:
|
|
3083
|
|
3084 @example
|
|
3085 if (foo < 17) @{
|
|
3086 @end example
|
|
3087
|
|
3088 @noindent
|
|
3089 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type
|
|
3090 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its
|
|
3091 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if
|
|
3092 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you
|
|
3093 something like:
|
|
3094
|
|
3095 @example
|
|
3096 ((substatement-open 1061))
|
|
3097 @end example
|
|
3098
|
|
3099 @noindent
|
|
3100 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))}
|
|
3101 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}.
|
|
3102
|
|
3103 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol,
|
|
3104 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}:
|
|
3105
|
|
3106 @example
|
|
3107 (brace-entry-open)
|
|
3108 @end example
|
|
3109
|
|
3110 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist},
|
|
3111 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a
|
|
3112 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a
|
|
3113 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this
|
|
3114 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace.
|
|
3115
|
|
3116 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist
|
|
3117 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
|
|
3118
|
|
3119 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to
|
|
3120 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association
|
|
3121 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the
|
|
3122 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list,
|
|
3123 or a function.
|
|
3124
|
|
3125 @table @asis
|
|
3126 @item The Key - the syntactic symbol
|
|
3127 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are
|
|
3128 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont},
|
|
3129 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the
|
|
3130 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
|
|
3131 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for
|
|
3132 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't
|
|
3133 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get
|
|
3134 ignored.
|
|
3135
|
|
3136 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special
|
|
3137 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that
|
|
3138 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The
|
|
3139 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of
|
|
3140 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in
|
|
3141 normal indentation analysis.}.
|
|
3142
|
|
3143 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})},
|
|
3144 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace
|
|
3145 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation
|
|
3146 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on
|
|
3147 these constructs.
|
|
3148
|
|
3149 @item The associated value - the ``ACTION'' list or function
|
|
3150 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association
|
|
3151 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a
|
|
3152 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use
|
|
3153 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}.
|
|
3154
|
|
3155 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's
|
|
3156 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and
|
|
3157 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in
|
|
3158 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains
|
|
3159 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side
|
|
3160 of the line, as in:
|
|
3161
|
|
3162 @example
|
|
3163 // here, open braces always `hang'
|
|
3164 void spam( int i ) @{
|
|
3165 if( i == 7 ) @{
|
|
3166 dosomething(i);
|
|
3167 @}
|
|
3168 @}
|
|
3169 @end example
|
|
3170
|
|
3171 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces
|
|
3172 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in
|
|
3173 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines
|
|
3174 are added neither before nor after the brace.
|
|
3175 @end table
|
|
3176
|
|
3177 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from
|
|
3178 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an
|
|
3179 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so
|
|
3180 that braces by default end up on their own line.
|
|
3181
|
|
3182 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is:
|
|
3183
|
|
3184 @example
|
|
3185 ((brace-list-open)
|
|
3186 (brace-entry-open)
|
|
3187 (statement-cont)
|
|
3188 (substatement-open after)
|
|
3189 (block-close . c-snug-do-while)
|
|
3190 (extern-lang-open after)
|
|
3191 (namespace-open after)
|
|
3192 (module-open after)
|
|
3193 (composition-open after)
|
|
3194 (inexpr-class-open after)
|
|
3195 (inexpr-class-close before))
|
|
3196 @end example
|
|
3197
|
|
3198 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open},
|
|
3199 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists
|
|
3200 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables
|
|
3201 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All
|
|
3202 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces
|
|
3203 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow
|
|
3204 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open},
|
|
3205 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang
|
|
3206 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line.
|
|
3207 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't
|
|
3208 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the
|
|
3209 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as
|
|
3210 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by
|
|
3211 themselves.
|
|
3212 @end defopt
|
|
3213
|
|
3214 @menu
|
|
3215 * Custom Braces::
|
|
3216 @end menu
|
|
3217
|
|
3218 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3219 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces
|
|
3220 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3221 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging
|
|
3222 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3223
|
|
3224 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist
|
|
3225 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
|
|
3226 @cindex action functions
|
|
3227 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize
|
|
3228 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember
|
|
3229 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of
|
|
3230 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}).
|
|
3231 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by
|
|
3232 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
|
|
3233 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the
|
|
3234 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it.
|
|
3235
|
|
3236 @cindex customization, brace hanging
|
|
3237 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
|
|
3238 for the brace (e.g. @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
|
|
3239 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
|
|
3240 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g. by using
|
|
3241 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
|
|
3242 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
|
|
3243 of them (i.e. @code{nil}).
|
|
3244
|
|
3245 @defvar c-syntactic-context
|
|
3246 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
|
|
3247 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action}
|
|
3248 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list.
|
|
3249 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever
|
|
3250 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt
|
|
3251 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}.
|
|
3252
|
|
3253 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances:
|
|
3254 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function
|
|
3255 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a
|
|
3256 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a
|
|
3257 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
|
|
3258 @end defvar
|
|
3259
|
|
3260 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically
|
|
3261 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while''
|
|
3262 constructs:
|
|
3263
|
|
3264 @example
|
|
3265 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string )
|
|
3266 @{
|
|
3267 int i=0;
|
|
3268 do @{
|
|
3269 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] );
|
|
3270 i++;
|
|
3271 @} while( i < count );
|
|
3272 @}
|
|
3273 @end example
|
|
3274
|
|
3275 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the
|
|
3276 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the
|
|
3277 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate
|
|
3278 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the
|
|
3279 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we
|
|
3280 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function
|
|
3281 @code{c-snug-do-while}:
|
|
3282
|
|
3283 @example
|
|
3284 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos)
|
|
3285 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements."
|
|
3286 (save-excursion
|
|
3287 (let (langelem)
|
|
3288 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close)
|
|
3289 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context))
|
|
3290 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem))
|
|
3291 (if (= (following-char) ?@{)
|
|
3292 (forward-sexp -1))
|
|
3293 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]")))
|
|
3294 '(before)
|
|
3295 '(before after)))))
|
|
3296 @end example
|
|
3297
|
|
3298 @findex c-snug-do-while
|
|
3299 @findex snug-do-while (c-)
|
|
3300 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while''
|
|
3301 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating
|
|
3302 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it.
|
|
3303 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so
|
|
3304 that the brace appears on a line by itself.
|
|
3305
|
|
3306 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3307 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines
|
|
3308 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3309 @section Hanging Colons
|
|
3310 @cindex hanging colons
|
|
3311 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3312
|
|
3313 @cindex customization, colon hanging
|
|
3314 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist
|
|
3315 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
|
|
3316
|
|
3317 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}),
|
|
3318 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable
|
|
3319 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} - When a colon is typed, @ccmode
|
|
3320 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist
|
|
3321 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines
|
|
3322 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a
|
|
3323 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the
|
|
3324 newly typed colon.
|
|
3325
|
|
3326 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist
|
|
3327 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
|
|
3328
|
|
3329 @table @asis
|
|
3330 @item The Key - the syntactic symbol
|
|
3331 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list
|
|
3332 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label},
|
|
3333 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic
|
|
3334 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored.
|
|
3335
|
|
3336 @item The associate value - the ``ACTION'' list
|
|
3337 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the
|
|
3338 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in
|
|
3339 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not
|
|
3340 supported - there doesn't seem to be any need for them.
|
|
3341 @end table
|
|
3342 @end defopt
|
|
3343
|
|
3344 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these
|
|
3345 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after
|
|
3346 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in
|
|
3347 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details.
|
|
3348
|
|
3349 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3350 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines
|
|
3351 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3352 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas
|
|
3353 @cindex hanging semicolons
|
|
3354 @cindex hanging commas
|
|
3355 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines
|
|
3356 @cindex customization, comma newlines
|
|
3357 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3358
|
|
3359 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria
|
|
3360 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-)
|
|
3361 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when
|
|
3362 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order
|
|
3363 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just
|
|
3364 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve
|
|
3365 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the
|
|
3366 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context
|
|
3367 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{}
|
|
3368 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines
|
|
3369 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so.
|
|
3370 They should return one of the following values:
|
|
3371
|
|
3372 @table @code
|
|
3373 @item t
|
|
3374 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no
|
|
3375 more functions from the list are to be called.
|
|
3376 @item stop
|
|
3377 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to
|
|
3378 be inserted.
|
|
3379 @item nil
|
|
3380 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is
|
|
3381 to be called.
|
|
3382 @end table
|
|
3383
|
|
3384 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon
|
|
3385 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a
|
|
3386 determination being made, then no newline is added.
|
|
3387
|
|
3388 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the
|
|
3389 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function,
|
|
3390 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all
|
|
3391 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements.
|
|
3392 @end defopt
|
|
3393
|
|
3394 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks
|
|
3395 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-)
|
|
3396 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It
|
|
3397 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a
|
|
3398 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To
|
|
3399 use, add this function to the front of the
|
|
3400 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list.
|
|
3401
|
|
3402 @example
|
|
3403 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks ()
|
|
3404 (save-excursion
|
|
3405 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;)
|
|
3406 (zerop (forward-line 1))
|
|
3407 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$")))
|
|
3408 'stop
|
|
3409 nil)))
|
|
3410 @end example
|
|
3411 @end defun
|
|
3412
|
|
3413 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist
|
|
3414 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-)
|
|
3415 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners
|
|
3416 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-)
|
|
3417 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents
|
|
3418 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for}
|
|
3419 statements. In addition to
|
|
3420 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above,
|
|
3421 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
|
|
3422 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
|
|
3423 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
|
|
3424 (e.g. in C++ or Java).
|
|
3425 @end defun
|
|
3426
|
|
3427
|
|
3428 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3429 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top
|
|
3430 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3431 @chapter Clean-ups
|
|
3432 @cindex clean-ups
|
|
3433 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3434
|
|
3435 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
|
|
3436 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
|
|
3437 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
|
|
3438 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g. like this:
|
|
3439
|
|
3440 @example
|
|
3441 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
|
|
3442 @end example
|
|
3443
|
|
3444 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
|
|
3445 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
|
|
3446 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e. to adjust
|
|
3447 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
|
|
3448
|
|
3449 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
|
|
3450 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will
|
|
3451 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there
|
|
3452 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components
|
|
3453 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the
|
|
3454 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}).
|
|
3455
|
|
3456 @defopt c-cleanup-list
|
|
3457 @vindex cleanup-list (c-)
|
|
3458 @cindex literal
|
|
3459
|
|
3460 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable
|
|
3461 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By
|
|
3462 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct,
|
|
3463 which is necessary for proper C++ support.
|
|
3464 @end defopt
|
|
3465
|
|
3466 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and
|
|
3467 auto-newline minor modes are enabled:
|
|
3468
|
|
3469 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a
|
|
3470 @c bit too much in dvi output.
|
|
3471 @table @code
|
|
3472 @item brace-else-brace
|
|
3473 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on
|
|
3474 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the
|
|
3475 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this:
|
|
3476
|
|
3477 @example
|
|
3478 @group
|
|
3479 void spam(int i)
|
|
3480 @{
|
|
3481 if( i==7 ) @{
|
|
3482 dosomething();
|
|
3483 @}
|
|
3484 else
|
|
3485 @{
|
|
3486 @end group
|
|
3487 @end example
|
|
3488
|
|
3489 @noindent
|
|
3490 appears like this after the last open brace is typed:
|
|
3491
|
|
3492 @example
|
|
3493 @group
|
|
3494 void spam(int i)
|
|
3495 @{
|
|
3496 if( i==7 ) @{
|
|
3497 dosomething();
|
|
3498 @} else @{
|
|
3499 @end group
|
|
3500 @end example
|
|
3501
|
|
3502 @item brace-elseif-brace
|
|
3503 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up
|
|
3504 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example:
|
|
3505
|
|
3506 @example
|
|
3507 @group
|
|
3508 void spam(int i)
|
|
3509 @{
|
|
3510 if( i==7 ) @{
|
|
3511 dosomething();
|
|
3512 @}
|
|
3513 else if( i==3 )
|
|
3514 @{
|
|
3515 @end group
|
|
3516 @end example
|
|
3517
|
|
3518 @noindent
|
|
3519 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed:
|
|
3520
|
|
3521 @example
|
|
3522 @group
|
|
3523 void spam(int i)
|
|
3524 @{
|
|
3525 if( i==7 ) @{
|
|
3526 dosomething();
|
|
3527 @} else if(
|
|
3528 @end group
|
|
3529 @end example
|
|
3530
|
|
3531 @noindent
|
|
3532 and like this after the last open brace is typed:
|
|
3533
|
|
3534 @example
|
|
3535 @group
|
|
3536 void spam(int i)
|
|
3537 @{
|
|
3538 if( i==7 ) @{
|
|
3539 dosomething();
|
|
3540 @} else if( i==3 ) @{
|
|
3541 @end group
|
|
3542 @end example
|
|
3543
|
|
3544 @item brace-catch-brace
|
|
3545 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch
|
|
3546 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode.
|
|
3547
|
|
3548 @item empty-defun-braces
|
|
3549 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that
|
|
3550 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed.
|
|
3551 Thus the following:
|
|
3552
|
|
3553 @example
|
|
3554 @group
|
|
3555 class Spam
|
|
3556 @{
|
|
3557 @}
|
|
3558 @end group
|
|
3559 @end example
|
|
3560
|
|
3561 @noindent
|
|
3562 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed:
|
|
3563
|
|
3564 @example
|
|
3565 @group
|
|
3566 class Spam
|
|
3567 @{@}
|
|
3568 @end group
|
|
3569 @end example
|
|
3570
|
|
3571 @item defun-close-semi
|
|
3572 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class
|
|
3573 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the
|
|
3574 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following:
|
|
3575
|
|
3576 @example
|
|
3577 @group
|
|
3578 class Spam
|
|
3579 @{
|
|
3580 ...
|
|
3581 @}
|
|
3582 ;
|
|
3583 @end group
|
|
3584 @end example
|
|
3585
|
|
3586 @noindent
|
|
3587 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed:
|
|
3588
|
|
3589 @example
|
|
3590 @group
|
|
3591 class Spam
|
|
3592 @{
|
|
3593 ...
|
|
3594 @};
|
|
3595 @end group
|
|
3596 @end example
|
|
3597
|
|
3598 @item list-close-comma
|
|
3599 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers.
|
|
3600 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma
|
|
3601 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in
|
|
3602 @code{defun-close-semi}.
|
|
3603
|
|
3604 @item scope-operator
|
|
3605 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split
|
|
3606 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce
|
|
3607 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not
|
|
3608 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers
|
|
3609 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is
|
|
3610 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the
|
|
3611 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code.
|
|
3612
|
|
3613 @item one-liner-defun
|
|
3614 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing
|
|
3615 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when
|
|
3616 the closing brace is typed. If the variable
|
|
3617 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the
|
|
3618 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable.
|
|
3619
|
|
3620 For example, consider this AWK code:
|
|
3621
|
|
3622 @example
|
|
3623 @group
|
|
3624 BEGIN @{
|
|
3625 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator
|
|
3626 @}
|
|
3627 @end group
|
|
3628 @end example
|
|
3629
|
|
3630 @noindent
|
|
3631 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed:
|
|
3632
|
|
3633 @example
|
|
3634 @group
|
|
3635 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator
|
|
3636 @end group
|
|
3637 @end example
|
|
3638
|
|
3639 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length
|
|
3640 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-)
|
|
3641 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up
|
|
3642 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire
|
|
3643 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its
|
|
3644 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit
|
|
3645 applies.
|
|
3646 @end defopt
|
|
3647 @end table
|
|
3648
|
|
3649 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on
|
|
3650 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or
|
|
3651 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
|
|
3652
|
|
3653 @table @code
|
|
3654 @item space-before-funcall
|
|
3655 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
|
|
3656 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
|
|
3657 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g. @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
|
|
3658 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
|
|
3659 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
|
|
3660 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
|
|
3661 functions.
|
|
3662
|
|
3663 @item compact-empty-funcall
|
|
3664 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
|
|
3665 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
|
|
3666 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
|
|
3667 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
|
|
3668 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e. you will get @samp{signal
|
|
3669 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
|
|
3670 closing parenthesis is typed.
|
|
3671
|
|
3672 @item comment-close-slash
|
|
3673 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
|
|
3674 at the beginning of a line (i.e. immediately after the comment prefix).
|
|
3675 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
|
|
3676 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
|
|
3677 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
|
|
3678 @end table
|
|
3679
|
|
3680
|
|
3681 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3682 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top
|
|
3683 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3684 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics
|
|
3685 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3686
|
|
3687 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code.
|
|
3688 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that
|
|
3689 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding
|
|
3690 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}.
|
|
3691
|
|
3692 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and
|
|
3693 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents
|
|
3694 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps:
|
|
3695
|
|
3696 @enumerate
|
|
3697 @item
|
|
3698 @cindex syntactic symbol
|
|
3699 @cindex anchor position
|
|
3700 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the
|
|
3701 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor
|
|
3702 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent
|
|
3703 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of
|
|
3704 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic
|
|
3705 Analysis}.
|
|
3706 @item
|
|
3707 @cindex offsets
|
|
3708 @cindex indentation offset specifications
|
|
3709 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the
|
|
3710 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means
|
|
3711 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{}
|
|
3712 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the
|
|
3713 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are
|
|
3714 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
|
|
3715 @end enumerate
|
|
3716
|
|
3717 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation
|
|
3718 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable
|
|
3719 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set
|
|
3720 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}).
|
|
3721
|
|
3722 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation
|
|
3723 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-)
|
|
3724 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation
|
|
3725 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's
|
|
3726 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the
|
|
3727 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the
|
|
3728 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style
|
|
3729 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any
|
|
3730 of the variables associated with indentation, not even
|
|
3731 @code{c-special-indent-hook}.
|
|
3732 @end defopt
|
|
3733
|
|
3734 @menu
|
|
3735 * Syntactic Analysis::
|
|
3736 * Syntactic Symbols::
|
|
3737 * Indentation Calculation::
|
|
3738 @end menu
|
|
3739
|
|
3740
|
|
3741 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3742 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics
|
|
3743 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3744 @section Syntactic Analysis
|
|
3745 @cindex syntactic analysis
|
|
3746 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3747
|
|
3748 @cindex syntactic element
|
|
3749 @cindex syntactic context
|
|
3750 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to
|
|
3751 analyze the line, determining the @dfn{syntactic context} of the
|
|
3752 (first) construct on that line. It's a list of @dfn{syntactic
|
|
3753 elements}, where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In
|
|
3754 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the
|
|
3755 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position.
|
|
3756 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function
|
|
3757 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a
|
|
3758 brief and typical example:
|
|
3759
|
|
3760 @example
|
|
3761 ((defun-block-intro 1959))
|
|
3762 @end example
|
|
3763
|
|
3764 @cindex syntactic symbol
|
|
3765 @noindent
|
|
3766 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
|
|
3767 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
|
|
3768 recognized, e.g. @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
|
|
3769 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
|
|
3770 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
|
|
3771 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
|
|
3772 with the recognized construct - there might be zero or more.
|
|
3773
|
|
3774 @cindex anchor position
|
|
3775 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some
|
|
3776 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the
|
|
3777 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the
|
|
3778 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in
|
|
3779 the syntactic element list then it's either nil or that anchor position.
|
|
3780
|
|
3781 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing
|
|
3782 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples
|
|
3783 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}:
|
|
3784
|
|
3785 @example
|
|
3786 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
|
|
3787 2: @{
|
|
3788 3: int tmp = a;
|
|
3789 4: a = b;
|
|
3790 5: b = tmp;
|
|
3791 6: @}
|
|
3792 @end example
|
|
3793
|
|
3794 @noindent
|
|
3795 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to
|
|
3796 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line:
|
|
3797
|
|
3798 @table @asis
|
|
3799 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information})
|
|
3800 @kindex C-c C-s
|
|
3801 @findex c-show-syntactic-information
|
|
3802 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-)
|
|
3803 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and
|
|
3804 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor
|
|
3805 position(s).
|
|
3806 @end table
|
|
3807
|
|
3808 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
|
|
3809 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e. @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
|
|
3810 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
|
|
3811 line.}:
|
|
3812
|
|
3813 @example
|
|
3814 ((statement 35))
|
|
3815 @end example
|
|
3816
|
|
3817 @noindent
|
|
3818 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This
|
|
3819 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to
|
|
3820 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move
|
|
3821 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see:
|
|
3822
|
|
3823 @example
|
|
3824 ((defun-block-intro 29))
|
|
3825 @end example
|
|
3826
|
|
3827 @noindent
|
|
3828 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top
|
|
3829 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29,
|
|
3830 which is the brace just after the function header.
|
|
3831
|
|
3832 Here's another example:
|
|
3833
|
|
3834 @example
|
|
3835 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
|
|
3836 2: @{
|
|
3837 3: if( doit )
|
|
3838 4: @{
|
|
3839 5: return( val + incr );
|
|
3840 6: @}
|
|
3841 7: return( val );
|
|
3842 8: @}
|
|
3843 @end example
|
|
3844
|
|
3845 @noindent
|
|
3846 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us:
|
|
3847
|
|
3848 @example
|
|
3849 ((substatement-open 46))
|
|
3850 @end example
|
|
3851
|
|
3852 @cindex substatement
|
|
3853 @cindex substatement block
|
|
3854 @noindent
|
|
3855 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement
|
|
3856 block. @footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a
|
|
3857 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while},
|
|
3858 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement
|
|
3859 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.}
|
|
3860
|
|
3861 @cindex comment-only line
|
|
3862 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic
|
|
3863 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of
|
|
3864 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}:
|
|
3865
|
|
3866 @example
|
|
3867 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables )
|
|
3868 2: @{
|
|
3869 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list
|
|
3870 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i )
|
|
3871 5: @{
|
|
3872 6: drawables[i].draw();
|
|
3873 7: @}
|
|
3874 8: @}
|
|
3875 @end example
|
|
3876
|
|
3877 @noindent
|
|
3878 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives:
|
|
3879
|
|
3880 @example
|
|
3881 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46))
|
|
3882 @end example
|
|
3883
|
|
3884 @noindent
|
|
3885 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic
|
|
3886 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no
|
|
3887 anchor position.
|
|
3888
|
|
3889
|
|
3890 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3891 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics
|
|
3892 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
3893 @section Syntactic Symbols
|
|
3894 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
3895
|
|
3896 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list
|
|
3897 @vindex c-offsets-alist
|
|
3898 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
|
|
3899 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear
|
|
3900 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief
|
|
3901 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis})
|
|
3902 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses
|
|
3903 them.
|
|
3904
|
|
3905 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of
|
|
3906 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the
|
|
3907 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor
|
|
3908 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not}
|
|
3909 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent
|
|
3910 line---this highlights the anchor position.
|
|
3911
|
|
3912 @ssindex -open symbols
|
|
3913 @ssindex -close symbols
|
|
3914 @ssindex -block-intro symbols
|
|
3915 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general
|
|
3916 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace,
|
|
3917 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or
|
|
3918 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block
|
|
3919 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}.
|
|
3920
|
|
3921 @ssindex -intro symbols
|
|
3922 @ssindex -cont symbols
|
|
3923 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually
|
|
3924 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the
|
|
3925 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these
|
|
3926 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont}
|
|
3927 respectively.
|
|
3928
|
|
3929 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some
|
|
3930 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code
|
|
3931 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}.
|
|
3932
|
|
3933 @table @code
|
|
3934 @item string
|
|
3935 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
|
|
3936 @item c
|
|
3937 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
|
|
3938 @item defun-open
|
|
3939 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
|
|
3940 Symbols}.
|
|
3941 @item defun-close
|
|
3942 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
|
|
3943 Symbols}.
|
|
3944 @item defun-block-intro
|
|
3945 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}.
|
|
3946 @item class-open
|
|
3947 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
3948 @item class-close
|
|
3949 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
3950 @item inline-open
|
|
3951 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
3952 @item inline-close
|
|
3953 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
3954 @item func-decl-cont
|
|
3955 The region between a function definition's argument list and the
|
|
3956 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C,
|
|
3957 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region,
|
|
3958 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things
|
|
3959 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not
|
|
3960 @c go somewhere better?}
|
|
3961 @item knr-argdecl-intro
|
|
3962 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
|
|
3963 @item knr-argdecl
|
|
3964 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
|
|
3965 @item topmost-intro
|
|
3966 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}.
|
|
3967 @item topmost-intro-cont
|
|
3968 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts
|
|
3969 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and
|
|
3970 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}.
|
|
3971 @item member-init-intro
|
|
3972 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
3973 @item member-init-cont
|
|
3974 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
3975 @item inher-intro
|
|
3976 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
3977 @item inher-cont
|
|
3978 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
3979 @item block-open
|
|
3980 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
|
|
3981 @item block-close
|
|
3982 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
|
|
3983 @item brace-list-open
|
|
3984 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
|
|
3985 @item brace-list-close
|
|
3986 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
|
|
3987 @item brace-list-intro
|
|
3988 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
|
|
3989 @item brace-list-entry
|
|
3990 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List
|
|
3991 Symbols}.
|
|
3992 @item brace-entry-open
|
|
3993 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins
|
|
3994 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
|
|
3995 @item statement
|
|
3996 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
|
|
3997 @item statement-cont
|
|
3998 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
|
|
3999 @item statement-block-intro
|
|
4000 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
|
|
4001 Symbols}.
|
|
4002 @item statement-case-intro
|
|
4003 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
|
|
4004 @item statement-case-open
|
|
4005 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch
|
|
4006 Statement Symbols}.
|
|
4007 @item substatement
|
|
4008 The first line after a conditional or loop construct.
|
|
4009 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
|
|
4010 @item substatement-open
|
|
4011 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
|
|
4012 Symbols}.
|
|
4013 @item substatement-label
|
|
4014 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label.
|
|
4015 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
|
|
4016 @item case-label
|
|
4017 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
|
|
4018 @item access-label
|
|
4019 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
4020 @item label
|
|
4021 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
|
|
4022 @item do-while-closure
|
|
4023 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct.
|
|
4024 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
|
|
4025 @item else-clause
|
|
4026 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct.
|
|
4027 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
|
|
4028 @item catch-clause
|
|
4029 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a
|
|
4030 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct
|
|
4031 Symbols}.
|
|
4032 @item comment-intro
|
|
4033 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
|
|
4034 @item arglist-intro
|
|
4035 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
|
|
4036 @item arglist-cont
|
|
4037 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same
|
|
4038 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
|
|
4039 @item arglist-cont-nonempty
|
|
4040 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on
|
|
4041 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
|
|
4042 @item arglist-close
|
|
4043 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
|
|
4044 @item stream-op
|
|
4045 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal
|
|
4046 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?}
|
|
4047 @item inclass
|
|
4048 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
4049 @item cpp-macro
|
|
4050 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
|
|
4051 @item cpp-define-intro
|
|
4052 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if
|
|
4053 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro
|
|
4054 Symbols}.
|
|
4055 @item cpp-macro-cont
|
|
4056 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if
|
|
4057 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}.
|
|
4058 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}.
|
|
4059 @item friend
|
|
4060 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
4061 @item objc-method-intro
|
|
4062 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
|
|
4063 Method Symbols}.
|
|
4064 @item objc-method-args-cont
|
|
4065 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
|
|
4066 Method Symbols}.
|
|
4067 @item objc-method-call-cont
|
|
4068 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
|
|
4069 Symbols}.
|
|
4070 @item extern-lang-open
|
|
4071 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g. @code{extern "C"
|
|
4072 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
|
|
4073 @item extern-lang-close
|
|
4074 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
|
|
4075 Symbols}.
|
|
4076 @item inextern-lang
|
|
4077 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside
|
|
4078 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
|
|
4079 @item namespace-open
|
|
4080 @itemx namespace-close
|
|
4081 @itemx innamespace
|
|
4082 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but
|
|
4083 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
|
|
4084 @item module-open
|
|
4085 @itemx module-close
|
|
4086 @itemx inmodule
|
|
4087 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks.
|
|
4088 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
|
|
4089 @item composition-open
|
|
4090 @itemx composition-close
|
|
4091 @itemx incomposition
|
|
4092 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
|
|
4093 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
|
|
4094 @item template-args-cont
|
|
4095 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
|
|
4096 @item inlambda
|
|
4097 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
|
|
4098 (i.e. anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
|
|
4099 Block Symbols}.
|
|
4100 @item lambda-intro-cont
|
|
4101 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e. between the
|
|
4102 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
|
|
4103 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
|
|
4104 @item inexpr-statement
|
|
4105 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension
|
|
4106 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that
|
|
4107 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block
|
|
4108 Symbols}.
|
|
4109 @item inexpr-class
|
|
4110 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous
|
|
4111 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in
|
|
4112 Java. @ref{Anonymous Class Symbol}.
|
|
4113 @end table
|
|
4114
|
|
4115 @menu
|
|
4116 * Function Symbols::
|
|
4117 * Class Symbols::
|
|
4118 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
|
|
4119 * Switch Statement Symbols::
|
|
4120 * Brace List Symbols::
|
|
4121 * External Scope Symbols::
|
|
4122 * Paren List Symbols::
|
|
4123 * Literal Symbols::
|
|
4124 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
|
|
4125 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
|
|
4126 * Anonymous Class Symbol::
|
|
4127 * Statement Block Symbols::
|
|
4128 * K&R Symbols::
|
|
4129 @end menu
|
|
4130
|
|
4131 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4132 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4133 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4134 @subsection Function Symbols
|
|
4135 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4136
|
|
4137 This example shows a typical function declaration.
|
|
4138
|
|
4139 @example
|
|
4140 1: void
|
|
4141 2: swap( int& a, int& b )
|
|
4142 3: @{
|
|
4143 4: int tmp = a;
|
|
4144 5: a = b;
|
|
4145 6: b = tmp;
|
|
4146 7: int ignored =
|
|
4147 8: a + b;
|
|
4148 9: @}
|
|
4149 @end example
|
|
4150
|
|
4151 @ssindex topmost-intro
|
|
4152 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont
|
|
4153 @ssindex defun-open
|
|
4154 @ssindex defun-close
|
|
4155 @ssindex defun-block-intro
|
|
4156 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that
|
|
4157 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the
|
|
4158 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
|
|
4159 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is
|
|
4160 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
|
|
4161 corresponding
|
|
4162 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
|
|
4163 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e. it is
|
|
4164 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
|
|
4165 top-level function definition.
|
|
4166
|
|
4167 @ssindex statement
|
|
4168 @ssindex statement-cont
|
|
4169 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there
|
|
4170 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given
|
|
4171 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun
|
|
4172 on the previous line.
|
|
4173
|
|
4174 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4175 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4176 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4177 @subsection Class related Symbols
|
|
4178 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4179
|
|
4180 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols:
|
|
4181
|
|
4182 @example
|
|
4183 1: class Bass
|
|
4184 2: : public Guitar,
|
|
4185 3: public Amplifiable
|
|
4186 4: @{
|
|
4187 5: public:
|
|
4188 6: Bass()
|
|
4189 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
|
|
4190 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
|
|
4191 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
|
|
4192 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
|
|
4193 11: @{
|
|
4194 12: eString.tune( 'E' );
|
|
4195 13: aString.tune( 'A' );
|
|
4196 14: dString.tune( 'D' );
|
|
4197 15: gString.tune( 'G' );
|
|
4198 16: @}
|
|
4199 17: friend class Luthier;
|
|
4200 18: @};
|
|
4201 @end example
|
|
4202
|
|
4203 @ssindex class-open
|
|
4204 @ssindex class-close
|
|
4205 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax.
|
|
4206 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is
|
|
4207 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes,
|
|
4208 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
|
|
4209 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
|
|
4210 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
|
|
4211 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
|
|
4212 for C and Objective-C. For consistency, structs in all supported
|
|
4213 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
|
|
4214 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
|
|
4215 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
|
|
4216
|
|
4217 @ssindex inher-intro
|
|
4218 @ssindex inher-cont
|
|
4219 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned
|
|
4220 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the
|
|
4221 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax.
|
|
4222
|
|
4223 @ssindex access-label
|
|
4224 @ssindex inclass
|
|
4225 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis:
|
|
4226
|
|
4227 @example
|
|
4228 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58))
|
|
4229 @end example
|
|
4230
|
|
4231 @noindent
|
|
4232 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as
|
|
4233 this a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However,
|
|
4234 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class
|
|
4235 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The
|
|
4236 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}.
|
|
4237 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro}
|
|
4238 syntax:
|
|
4239
|
|
4240 @example
|
|
4241 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60))
|
|
4242 @end example
|
|
4243
|
|
4244 @ssindex member-init-intro
|
|
4245 @ssindex member-init-cont
|
|
4246 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given
|
|
4247 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is
|
|
4248 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a
|
|
4249 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned
|
|
4250 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization
|
|
4251 list started on line 7.
|
|
4252
|
|
4253 @cindex in-class inline methods
|
|
4254 @ssindex inline-open
|
|
4255 @ssindex inline-close
|
|
4256 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated:
|
|
4257
|
|
4258 @example
|
|
4259 ((inclass 58) (inline-open))
|
|
4260 @end example
|
|
4261
|
|
4262 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and
|
|
4263 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method
|
|
4264 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an
|
|
4265 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class
|
|
4266 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined.
|
|
4267 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared
|
|
4268 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the
|
|
4269 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared
|
|
4270 before the method name, as in:
|
|
4271
|
|
4272 @example
|
|
4273 1: class Bass
|
|
4274 2: : public Guitar,
|
|
4275 3: public Amplifiable
|
|
4276 4: @{
|
|
4277 5: public:
|
|
4278 6: Bass();
|
|
4279 7: @};
|
|
4280 8:
|
|
4281 9: inline
|
|
4282 10: Bass::Bass()
|
|
4283 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
|
|
4284 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
|
|
4285 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
|
|
4286 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
|
|
4287 15: @{
|
|
4288 16: eString.tune( 'E' );
|
|
4289 17: aString.tune( 'A' );
|
|
4290 18: dString.tune( 'D' );
|
|
4291 19: gString.tune( 'G' );
|
|
4292 20: @}
|
|
4293 @end example
|
|
4294
|
|
4295 @ssindex friend
|
|
4296 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close}
|
|
4297 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines
|
|
4298 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is
|
|
4299 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three
|
|
4300 elements:
|
|
4301
|
|
4302 @example
|
|
4303 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend))
|
|
4304 @end example
|
|
4305
|
|
4306 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are
|
|
4307 modifiers that do not have anchor positions.
|
|
4308
|
|
4309 @ssindex template-args-cont
|
|
4310 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol:
|
|
4311
|
|
4312 @example
|
|
4313 1: ThingManager <int,
|
|
4314 2: Framework::Callback *,
|
|
4315 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks;
|
|
4316 @end example
|
|
4317
|
|
4318 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3
|
|
4319 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines.
|
|
4320
|
|
4321 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4322 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4323 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4324 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols
|
|
4325 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4326
|
|
4327 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is
|
|
4328 assigned to various conditional constructs:
|
|
4329
|
|
4330 @example
|
|
4331 1: void spam( int index )
|
|
4332 2: @{
|
|
4333 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ )
|
|
4334 4: @{
|
|
4335 5: if( i == 10 )
|
|
4336 6: do_something_special();
|
|
4337 7: else
|
|
4338 8: silly_label:
|
|
4339 9: do_something( i );
|
|
4340 10: @}
|
|
4341 11: do @{
|
|
4342 12: another_thing( i-- );
|
|
4343 13: @}
|
|
4344 14: while( i > 0 );
|
|
4345 15: @}
|
|
4346 @end example
|
|
4347
|
|
4348 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed.
|
|
4349
|
|
4350 @ssindex substatement-open
|
|
4351 @ssindex statement-block-intro
|
|
4352 @ssindex block-close
|
|
4353 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It
|
|
4354 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is
|
|
4355 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned
|
|
4356 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace
|
|
4357 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the
|
|
4358 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for
|
|
4359 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal
|
|
4360 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way.
|
|
4361
|
|
4362 @ssindex substatement
|
|
4363 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they
|
|
4364 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax
|
|
4365 instead of @code{substatement-open}.
|
|
4366
|
|
4367 @ssindex substatement-label
|
|
4368 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax.
|
|
4369 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and
|
|
4370 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you
|
|
4371 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels.
|
|
4372
|
|
4373 @ssindex else-clause
|
|
4374 @ssindex catch-clause
|
|
4375 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on
|
|
4376 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is
|
|
4377 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch}
|
|
4378 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that
|
|
4379 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with
|
|
4380 @code{catch-clause}.
|
|
4381
|
|
4382 @ssindex do-while-closure
|
|
4383 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do}
|
|
4384 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it
|
|
4385 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on
|
|
4386 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have
|
|
4387 @code{block-close} syntax.
|
|
4388
|
|
4389 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4390 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4391 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4392 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols
|
|
4393 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4394
|
|
4395 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an
|
|
4396 example:
|
|
4397
|
|
4398 @example
|
|
4399 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i )
|
|
4400 2: @{
|
|
4401 3: switch( i ) @{
|
|
4402 4: case Ham:
|
|
4403 5: be_a_pig();
|
|
4404 6: break;
|
|
4405 7: case Salt:
|
|
4406 8: drink_some_water();
|
|
4407 9: break;
|
|
4408 10: default:
|
|
4409 11: @{
|
|
4410 12: what_is_it();
|
|
4411 13: break;
|
|
4412 14: @}
|
|
4413 15: @}
|
|
4414 14: @}
|
|
4415 @end example
|
|
4416
|
|
4417 @ssindex case-label
|
|
4418 @ssindex statement-case-intro
|
|
4419 @ssindex statement-case-open
|
|
4420 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax,
|
|
4421 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11
|
|
4422 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a
|
|
4423 block --- it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax.
|
|
4424
|
|
4425 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4426 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4427 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4428 @subsection Brace List Symbols
|
|
4429 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4430
|
|
4431 @cindex brace lists
|
|
4432 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize
|
|
4433 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an
|
|
4434 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically
|
|
4435 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs
|
|
4436 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as
|
|
4437 brace lists too. An example:
|
|
4438
|
|
4439 @example
|
|
4440 1: static char* ingredients[] =
|
|
4441 2: @{
|
|
4442 3: "Ham",
|
|
4443 4: "Salt",
|
|
4444 5: NULL
|
|
4445 6: @};
|
|
4446 @end example
|
|
4447
|
|
4448 @ssindex brace-list-open
|
|
4449 @ssindex brace-list-intro
|
|
4450 @ssindex brace-list-close
|
|
4451 @ssindex brace-list-entry
|
|
4452 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned
|
|
4453 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned
|
|
4454 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned
|
|
4455 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned
|
|
4456 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this
|
|
4457 initializer list.
|
|
4458
|
|
4459 @ssindex brace-entry-open
|
|
4460 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for
|
|
4461 example:
|
|
4462
|
|
4463 @example
|
|
4464 1: struct intpairs[] =
|
|
4465 2: @{
|
|
4466 3: @{ 1, 2 @},
|
|
4467 4: @{
|
|
4468 5: 3,
|
|
4469 6: 4
|
|
4470 7: @}
|
|
4471 8: @{ 1,
|
|
4472 9: 2 @},
|
|
4473 10: @{ 3, 4 @}
|
|
4474 11: @};
|
|
4475 @end example
|
|
4476
|
|
4477 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On
|
|
4478 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned
|
|
4479 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry
|
|
4480 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are
|
|
4481 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd
|
|
4482 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is
|
|
4483 line 10.
|
|
4484
|
|
4485 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4486 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4487 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4488 @subsection External Scope Symbols
|
|
4489 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4490
|
|
4491 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic
|
|
4492 symbols. In this example:
|
|
4493
|
|
4494 @example
|
|
4495 1: extern "C"
|
|
4496 2: @{
|
|
4497 3: int thing_one( int );
|
|
4498 4: int thing_two( double );
|
|
4499 5: @}
|
|
4500 @end example
|
|
4501
|
|
4502 @ssindex extern-lang-open
|
|
4503 @ssindex extern-lang-close
|
|
4504 @ssindex inextern-lang
|
|
4505 @ssindex inclass
|
|
4506 @noindent
|
|
4507 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given
|
|
4508 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields:
|
|
4509
|
|
4510 @example
|
|
4511 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14))
|
|
4512 @end example
|
|
4513
|
|
4514 @noindent
|
|
4515 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
|
|
4516 @code{inclass}.
|
|
4517
|
|
4518 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
|
|
4519 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
|
|
4520 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g. C++ namespace blocks get
|
|
4521 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
|
|
4522 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
|
|
4523
|
|
4524 @table @asis
|
|
4525 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang}
|
|
4526 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be
|
|
4527 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but
|
|
4528 that isn't the case for historical reasons.}
|
|
4529
|
|
4530 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace}
|
|
4531 @ssindex namespace-open
|
|
4532 @ssindex namespace-close
|
|
4533 @ssindex innamespace
|
|
4534 @code{namespace} blocks in C++.
|
|
4535
|
|
4536 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule}
|
|
4537 @ssindex module-open
|
|
4538 @ssindex module-close
|
|
4539 @ssindex inmodule
|
|
4540 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL.
|
|
4541
|
|
4542 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition}
|
|
4543 @ssindex composition-open
|
|
4544 @ssindex composition-close
|
|
4545 @ssindex incomposition
|
|
4546 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL.
|
|
4547 @end table
|
|
4548
|
|
4549 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4550 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4551 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4552 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols
|
|
4553 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4554
|
|
4555 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists,
|
|
4556 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function
|
|
4557 calls. This example illustrates these:
|
|
4558
|
|
4559 @example
|
|
4560 1: void a_function( int line1,
|
|
4561 2: int line2 );
|
|
4562 3:
|
|
4563 4: void a_longer_function(
|
|
4564 5: int line1,
|
|
4565 6: int line2
|
|
4566 7: );
|
|
4567 8:
|
|
4568 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 )
|
|
4569 10: @{
|
|
4570 11: a_function(
|
|
4571 12: line1,
|
|
4572 13: line2
|
|
4573 14: );
|
|
4574 15:
|
|
4575 16: a_longer_function( line1,
|
|
4576 17: line2 );
|
|
4577 18: @}
|
|
4578 @end example
|
|
4579
|
|
4580 @ssindex arglist-intro
|
|
4581 @ssindex arglist-close
|
|
4582 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are
|
|
4583 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are
|
|
4584 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis
|
|
4585 that closes the argument list.
|
|
4586
|
|
4587 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty
|
|
4588 @ssindex arglist-cont
|
|
4589 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic
|
|
4590 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17
|
|
4591 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means
|
|
4592 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the
|
|
4593 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open
|
|
4594 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned
|
|
4595 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens
|
|
4596 their argument lists is the last character on that line.
|
|
4597
|
|
4598 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro},
|
|
4599 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two
|
|
4600 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the
|
|
4601 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis.
|
|
4602 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up
|
|
4603 Functions}).
|
|
4604
|
|
4605 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any
|
|
4606 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line,
|
|
4607 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead.
|
|
4608
|
|
4609 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4610 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4611 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4612 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols
|
|
4613 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4614
|
|
4615 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously
|
|
4616 covered are illustrated by this C++ example:
|
|
4617
|
|
4618 @example
|
|
4619 1: void Bass::play( int volume )
|
|
4620 2: const
|
|
4621 3: @{
|
|
4622 4: /* this line starts a multiline
|
|
4623 5: * comment. This line should get `c' syntax */
|
|
4624 6:
|
|
4625 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \
|
|
4626 8: string. This line should get `string' syntax.";
|
|
4627 9:
|
|
4628 10: note:
|
|
4629 11: @{
|
|
4630 12: #ifdef LOCK
|
|
4631 13: Lock acquire();
|
|
4632 14: #endif // LOCK
|
|
4633 15: slap_pop();
|
|
4634 16: cout << "I played "
|
|
4635 17: << "a note\n";
|
|
4636 18: @}
|
|
4637 19: @}
|
|
4638 @end example
|
|
4639
|
|
4640 The lines to note in this example include:
|
|
4641
|
|
4642 @itemize @bullet
|
|
4643 @item
|
|
4644 @ssindex func-decl-cont
|
|
4645 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax.
|
|
4646
|
|
4647 @item
|
|
4648 @ssindex comment-intro
|
|
4649 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and}
|
|
4650 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with
|
|
4651 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point --- It is always accompanied
|
|
4652 by another syntactic element which does have one.
|
|
4653
|
|
4654 @item
|
|
4655 @ssindex c
|
|
4656 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax.
|
|
4657
|
|
4658 @item
|
|
4659 @cindex syntactic whitespace
|
|
4660 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is
|
|
4661 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the
|
|
4662 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned
|
|
4663 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be
|
|
4664 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing
|
|
4665 code.
|
|
4666
|
|
4667 @item
|
|
4668 @ssindex string
|
|
4669 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax.
|
|
4670
|
|
4671 @item
|
|
4672 @ssindex label
|
|
4673 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax.
|
|
4674
|
|
4675 @item
|
|
4676 @ssindex block-open
|
|
4677 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement}
|
|
4678 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor
|
|
4679 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which
|
|
4680 does have one.
|
|
4681
|
|
4682 @item
|
|
4683 @ssindex cpp-macro
|
|
4684 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the
|
|
4685 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and
|
|
4686 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is
|
|
4687 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all
|
|
4688 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily
|
|
4689 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest
|
|
4690 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with
|
|
4691 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position.
|
|
4692
|
|
4693 @item
|
|
4694 @ssindex stream-op
|
|
4695 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
|
|
4696 @end itemize
|
|
4697
|
|
4698 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4699 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4700 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4701 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols
|
|
4702 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4703
|
|
4704 @cindex multiline macros
|
|
4705 @cindex syntactic whitespace
|
|
4706 @ssindex cpp-define-intro
|
|
4707 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont
|
|
4708 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
|
|
4709 other code, i.e. the lines inside them are indented according to the
|
|
4710 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
|
|
4711 line inside a macro definition (i.e. the line after the starting line of
|
|
4712 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
|
|
4713
|
|
4714 @example
|
|
4715 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \
|
|
4716 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \
|
|
4717 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \
|
|
4718 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \
|
|
4719 5: else
|
|
4720 @end example
|
|
4721
|
|
4722 @noindent
|
|
4723 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
|
|
4724 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
|
|
4725 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
|
|
4726 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
|
|
4727 code, i.e. @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
|
|
4728 on line 5.
|
|
4729
|
|
4730 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
|
|
4731 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In
|
|
4732 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont}
|
|
4733 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp
|
|
4734 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed
|
|
4735 macros.}.
|
|
4736
|
|
4737 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros.
|
|
4738
|
|
4739 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4740 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Anonymous Class Symbol, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4741 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4742 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols
|
|
4743 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4744
|
|
4745 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols
|
|
4746 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example
|
|
4747 illustrating these:
|
|
4748
|
|
4749 @example
|
|
4750 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject
|
|
4751 2: withStuff:stuff
|
|
4752 3: @{
|
|
4753 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self
|
|
4754 5: toDelegate:anObject
|
|
4755 6: withExtraStuff:stuff];
|
|
4756 7: @}
|
|
4757 @end example
|
|
4758
|
|
4759 @ssindex objc-method-intro
|
|
4760 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont
|
|
4761 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont
|
|
4762 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is
|
|
4763 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both
|
|
4764 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax.
|
|
4765
|
|
4766 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4767 @node Anonymous Class Symbol, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4768 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4769 @subsection Anonymous Class Symbol (Java)
|
|
4770 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4771
|
|
4772 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like
|
|
4773 this:
|
|
4774
|
|
4775 @example
|
|
4776 1: public void watch(Observable o) @{
|
|
4777 2: o.addObserver(new Observer() @{
|
|
4778 3: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{
|
|
4779 4: history.addElement(arg);
|
|
4780 5: @}
|
|
4781 6: @});
|
|
4782 7: @}
|
|
4783 @end example
|
|
4784
|
|
4785 @ssindex inexpr-class
|
|
4786 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class.
|
|
4787 Lines 3 and 6 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the
|
|
4788 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be
|
|
4789 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to
|
|
4790 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't
|
|
4791 have an anchor position.
|
|
4792
|
|
4793 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4794 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Anonymous Class Symbol, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4795 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4796 @subsection Statement Block Symbols
|
|
4797 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4798
|
|
4799 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside
|
|
4800 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for
|
|
4801 this, e.g:
|
|
4802
|
|
4803 @example
|
|
4804 1: int res = (@{
|
|
4805 2: int y = foo (); int z;
|
|
4806 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y;
|
|
4807 4: z;
|
|
4808 5: @});
|
|
4809 @end example
|
|
4810
|
|
4811 @ssindex inexpr-statement
|
|
4812 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the
|
|
4813 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on
|
|
4814 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block
|
|
4815 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't
|
|
4816 contain an anchor position.
|
|
4817
|
|
4818 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside
|
|
4819 statements, as illustrated here:
|
|
4820
|
|
4821 @example
|
|
4822 1: array itgob()
|
|
4823 2: @{
|
|
4824 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..],
|
|
4825 4: lambda
|
|
4826 5: (mixed arg)
|
|
4827 6: @{
|
|
4828 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg);
|
|
4829 8: @}) * ", " + "\n";
|
|
4830 9: return catch @{
|
|
4831 10: write (s + "\n");
|
|
4832 11: @};
|
|
4833 12: @}
|
|
4834 @end example
|
|
4835
|
|
4836 @ssindex inlambda
|
|
4837 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont
|
|
4838 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes
|
|
4839 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put
|
|
4840 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont}
|
|
4841 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the
|
|
4842 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line
|
|
4843 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets
|
|
4844 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get
|
|
4845 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the
|
|
4846 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the
|
|
4847 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace
|
|
4848 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}.
|
|
4849
|
|
4850 @ssindex inexpr-statement
|
|
4851 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block
|
|
4852 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement
|
|
4853 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C
|
|
4854 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is
|
|
4855 handled like this too.
|
|
4856
|
|
4857 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4858 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
|
|
4859 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4860 @subsection K&R Symbols
|
|
4861 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4862
|
|
4863 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
|
|
4864 @ssindex knr-argdecl
|
|
4865 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
|
|
4866 code @footnote{a.k.a. K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
|
|
4867
|
|
4868 @example
|
|
4869 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
|
|
4870 2: int a;
|
|
4871 3: int b;
|
|
4872 4: int c;
|
|
4873 5: @{
|
|
4874 6: return a + b + c;
|
|
4875 7: @}
|
|
4876 @end example
|
|
4877
|
|
4878 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
|
|
4879 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
|
|
4880 (i.e. lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
|
|
4881 syntax.
|
|
4882
|
|
4883
|
|
4884 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4885 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics
|
|
4886 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4887 @section Indentation Calculation
|
|
4888 @cindex indentation
|
|
4889 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4890
|
|
4891 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context
|
|
4892 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
|
|
4893
|
|
4894 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the
|
|
4895 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first
|
|
4896 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic
|
|
4897 element has an anchor position then column zero is used.
|
|
4898
|
|
4899 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up
|
|
4900 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable
|
|
4901 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic
|
|
4902 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are
|
|
4903 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation
|
|
4904 column.
|
|
4905
|
|
4906 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is
|
|
4907 our first example again:
|
|
4908
|
|
4909 @example
|
|
4910 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
|
|
4911 2: @{
|
|
4912 3: int tmp = a;
|
|
4913 4: a = b;
|
|
4914 5: b = tmp;
|
|
4915 6: @}
|
|
4916 @end example
|
|
4917
|
|
4918 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent
|
|
4919 the line. The syntactic context for that line is:
|
|
4920
|
|
4921 @example
|
|
4922 ((defun-block-intro 29))
|
|
4923 @end example
|
|
4924
|
|
4925 @noindent
|
|
4926 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the
|
|
4927 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace
|
|
4928 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column.
|
|
4929
|
|
4930 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the
|
|
4931 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value
|
|
4932 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running
|
|
4933 total indentation of 4 spaces.
|
|
4934
|
|
4935 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line,
|
|
4936 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the
|
|
4937 line is 4 spaces.
|
|
4938
|
|
4939 Here's another example:
|
|
4940
|
|
4941 @example
|
|
4942 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
|
|
4943 2: @{
|
|
4944 3: if( doit )
|
|
4945 4: @{
|
|
4946 5: return( val + incr );
|
|
4947 6: @}
|
|
4948 7: return( val );
|
|
4949 8: @}
|
|
4950 @end example
|
|
4951
|
|
4952 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same
|
|
4953 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic
|
|
4954 context. The context for this line is:
|
|
4955
|
|
4956 @example
|
|
4957 ((substatement-open 46))
|
|
4958 @end example
|
|
4959
|
|
4960 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in
|
|
4961 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that
|
|
4962 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the
|
|
4963 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it
|
|
4964 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an
|
|
4965 indentation for the line of 8 spaces.
|
|
4966
|
|
4967 Simple, huh?
|
|
4968
|
|
4969 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on
|
|
4970 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets.
|
|
4971 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story.
|
|
4972
|
|
4973 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to
|
|
4974 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation,
|
|
4975 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used.
|
|
4976
|
|
4977 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable
|
|
4978 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the
|
|
4979 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the
|
|
4980 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}.
|
|
4981
|
|
4982
|
|
4983 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4984 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top
|
|
4985 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
4986 @chapter Customizing Indentation
|
|
4987 @cindex customization, indentation
|
|
4988 @cindex indentation
|
|
4989 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
4990
|
|
4991 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style
|
|
4992 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an
|
|
4993 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and
|
|
4994 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The
|
|
4995 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the
|
|
4996 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its
|
|
4997 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}.
|
|
4998
|
|
4999 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in
|
|
5000 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of
|
|
5001 @code{c-basic-offset}:
|
|
5002
|
|
5003 @defopt c-basic-offset
|
|
5004 @vindex basic-offset (c-)
|
|
5005 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels.
|
|
5006 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it
|
|
5007 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for
|
|
5008 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles).
|
|
5009 @end defopt
|
|
5010
|
|
5011 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in
|
|
5012 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them),
|
|
5013 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one
|
|
5014 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).
|
|
5015
|
|
5016 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last
|
|
5017 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You
|
|
5018 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's
|
|
5019 indentation.
|
|
5020
|
|
5021 @menu
|
|
5022 * c-offsets-alist::
|
|
5023 * Interactive Customization::
|
|
5024 * Line-Up Functions::
|
|
5025 * Custom Line-Up::
|
|
5026 * Other Indentation::
|
|
5027 @end menu
|
|
5028
|
|
5029
|
|
5030 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5031 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation
|
|
5032 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
5033 @section c-offsets-alist
|
|
5034 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5035
|
|
5036 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style
|
|
5037 variable @code{c-offset-alist}, the principal variable for configuring
|
|
5038 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to
|
|
5039 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}.
|
|
5040
|
|
5041 @defopt c-offsets-alist
|
|
5042 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
|
|
5043 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic
|
|
5044 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line
|
|
5045 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic
|
|
5046 Analysis}.
|
|
5047
|
|
5048 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer
|
|
5049 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global
|
|
5050 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain
|
|
5051 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}.
|
|
5052
|
|
5053 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic
|
|
5054 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or
|
|
5055 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols:
|
|
5056 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The
|
|
5057 meanings of these values are described in detail below.
|
|
5058
|
|
5059 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some
|
|
5060 of these kinds of offsets:
|
|
5061
|
|
5062 @example
|
|
5063 ((statement . 0)
|
|
5064 (substatement . +)
|
|
5065 (cpp-macro . [0])
|
|
5066 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont)
|
|
5067 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
|
|
5068 c-indent-multi-line-block))
|
|
5069 @dots{}
|
|
5070 @*)
|
|
5071 @end example
|
|
5072 @end defopt
|
|
5073
|
|
5074 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o})
|
|
5075 @findex set-offset (c-)
|
|
5076 @kindex C-c C-o
|
|
5077 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current
|
|
5078 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there
|
|
5079 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol.
|
|
5080
|
|
5081 You can use @code{c-set-offsets} interactively within a @ccmode{}
|
|
5082 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings.
|
|
5083 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change
|
|
5084 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset
|
|
5085 (defaulting to the current offset).
|
|
5086
|
|
5087 @code{c-set-offsets} takes two arguments when used programmatically:
|
|
5088 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset},
|
|
5089 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command
|
|
5090 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of
|
|
5091 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a
|
|
5092 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{}
|
|
5093 itself uses this function when initializing styles.
|
|
5094 @end deffn
|
|
5095
|
|
5096 @cindex offset specification
|
|
5097 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of
|
|
5098 the following:
|
|
5099
|
|
5100 @table @asis
|
|
5101 @item An integer
|
|
5102 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative
|
|
5103 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro
|
|
5104 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will
|
|
5105 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an
|
|
5106 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation
|
|
5107 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to
|
|
5108 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart
|
|
5109 from zero).
|
|
5110
|
|
5111 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}
|
|
5112 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of
|
|
5113 @code{c-basic-offset}:
|
|
5114
|
|
5115 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset},
|
|
5116 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level
|
|
5117 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the
|
|
5118 values that the special symbols correspond to:
|
|
5119
|
|
5120 @table @code
|
|
5121 @item +
|
|
5122 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1
|
|
5123 @item -
|
|
5124 @code{c-basic-offset} times -1
|
|
5125 @item ++
|
|
5126 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2
|
|
5127 @item --
|
|
5128 @code{c-basic-offset} times -2
|
|
5129 @item *
|
|
5130 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5
|
|
5131 @item /
|
|
5132 @code{c-basic-offset} times -0.5
|
|
5133 @end table
|
|
5134
|
|
5135 @item A vector
|
|
5136 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute
|
|
5137 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated
|
|
5138 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from
|
|
5139 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being
|
|
5140 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector
|
|
5141 beyond the first will be ignored.
|
|
5142
|
|
5143 @item A function or lambda expression
|
|
5144 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be
|
|
5145 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more
|
|
5146 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired
|
|
5147 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for
|
|
5148 details about them.
|
|
5149
|
|
5150 @item A symbol with a variable binding
|
|
5151 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes
|
|
5152 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is
|
|
5153 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a
|
|
5154 vector (an absolute offset).
|
|
5155
|
|
5156 @item A list
|
|
5157 The offset can also be a list containing several offset
|
|
5158 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list
|
|
5159 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up
|
|
5160 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in
|
|
5161 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the
|
|
5162 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value.
|
|
5163
|
|
5164 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined.
|
|
5165 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the
|
|
5166 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements:
|
|
5167
|
|
5168 @table @code
|
|
5169 @item first
|
|
5170 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent
|
|
5171 elements of the list don't get evaluated.
|
|
5172 @item min
|
|
5173 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
|
|
5174 absolute - they can't be mixed.
|
|
5175 @item max
|
|
5176 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
|
|
5177 absolute - they can't be mixed.
|
|
5178 @item add
|
|
5179 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be
|
|
5180 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets
|
|
5181 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case.
|
|
5182 @end table
|
|
5183
|
|
5184 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above
|
|
5185 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list
|
|
5186 will be combined according to the method @code{first}.
|
|
5187 @end table
|
|
5188
|
|
5189 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p
|
|
5190 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-)
|
|
5191 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative
|
|
5192 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable
|
|
5193 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an
|
|
5194 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since
|
|
5195 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return
|
|
5196 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave
|
|
5197 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}.
|
|
5198
|
|
5199 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5200 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation
|
|
5201 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
5202 @section Interactive Customization
|
|
5203 @cindex customization, interactive
|
|
5204 @cindex interactive customization
|
|
5205 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5206
|
|
5207 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the
|
|
5208 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the
|
|
5209 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise
|
|
5210 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}:
|
|
5211
|
|
5212 @example
|
|
5213 @group
|
|
5214 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
|
|
5215 2: @{
|
|
5216 3: if( doit )
|
|
5217 4: @{
|
|
5218 5: return( val + incr );
|
|
5219 6: @}
|
|
5220 7: return( val );
|
|
5221 8: @}
|
|
5222 @end group
|
|
5223 @end example
|
|
5224
|
|
5225 @noindent
|
|
5226 to:
|
|
5227
|
|
5228 @example
|
|
5229 @group
|
|
5230 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
|
|
5231 2: @{
|
|
5232 3: if( doit )
|
|
5233 4: @{
|
|
5234 5: return( val + incr );
|
|
5235 6: @}
|
|
5236 7: return( val );
|
|
5237 8: @}
|
|
5238 @end group
|
|
5239 @end example
|
|
5240
|
|
5241 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a
|
|
5242 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the
|
|
5243 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we
|
|
5244 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line,
|
|
5245 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations
|
|
5246 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields:
|
|
5247
|
|
5248 @example
|
|
5249 ((substatement-open 44))
|
|
5250 @end example
|
|
5251
|
|
5252 @noindent
|
|
5253 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to
|
|
5254 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic
|
|
5255 symbol.
|
|
5256
|
|
5257 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts
|
|
5258 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default.
|
|
5259 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the
|
|
5260 syntactic symbol we want to change!
|
|
5261
|
|
5262 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new
|
|
5263 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this
|
|
5264 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter
|
|
5265 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the
|
|
5266 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}.
|
|
5267
|
|
5268 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q}
|
|
5269 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example
|
|
5270 should now look like:
|
|
5271
|
|
5272 @example
|
|
5273 @group
|
|
5274 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
|
|
5275 2: @{
|
|
5276 3: if( doit )
|
|
5277 4: @{
|
|
5278 5: return( val + incr );
|
|
5279 6: @}
|
|
5280 7: return( val );
|
|
5281 8: @}
|
|
5282 @end group
|
|
5283 @end example
|
|
5284
|
|
5285 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we
|
|
5286 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to
|
|
5287 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more
|
|
5288 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach
|
|
5289 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the
|
|
5290 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further
|
|
5291 adjustments.
|
|
5292
|
|
5293 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7)
|
|
5294 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset
|
|
5295 @findex set-offset (c-)
|
|
5296 @kindex C-c C-o
|
|
5297 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient
|
|
5298 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see
|
|
5299 the example above) and from your mode hook.
|
|
5300
|
|
5301 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the
|
|
5302 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset
|
|
5303 for that syntactic element.
|
|
5304 @end deffn
|
|
5305 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT.
|
|
5306
|
|
5307 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5308 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation
|
|
5309 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
5310 @section Line-Up Functions
|
|
5311 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5312
|
|
5313 @cindex line-up function
|
|
5314 @cindex indentation function
|
|
5315 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic
|
|
5316 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you
|
|
5317 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening
|
|
5318 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{}
|
|
5319 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}.
|
|
5320
|
|
5321 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is
|
|
5322 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many
|
|
5323 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these
|
|
5324 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}.
|
|
5325 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a
|
|
5326 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
|
|
5327
|
|
5328 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested
|
|
5329 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
|
|
5330 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode.
|
|
5331
|
|
5332 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in
|
|
5333 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an
|
|
5334 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil},
|
|
5335 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case - try a
|
|
5336 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}.
|
|
5337
|
|
5338 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions,
|
|
5339 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For
|
|
5340 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates
|
|
5341 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with.
|
|
5342
|
|
5343 @macro workswith
|
|
5344 @emph{Works with:@ }
|
|
5345 @end macro
|
|
5346 @ifinfo
|
|
5347 @unmacro workswith
|
|
5348 @macro workswith
|
|
5349 Works with:
|
|
5350 @end macro
|
|
5351 @end ifinfo
|
|
5352
|
|
5353 @macro sssTBasicOffset
|
|
5354 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
|
|
5355 @end macro
|
|
5356
|
|
5357 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset
|
|
5358 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
|
|
5359 @end macro
|
|
5360
|
|
5361 @macro hereFn{func}
|
|
5362 <- @i{\func\}@c
|
|
5363 @end macro
|
|
5364
|
|
5365 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P
|
|
5366 @iftex
|
|
5367 @unmacro hereFn
|
|
5368 @macro hereFn{func}
|
|
5369 <-@i{\func\}@c
|
|
5370 @end macro
|
|
5371 @end iftex
|
|
5372
|
|
5373 @menu
|
|
5374 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
|
|
5375 * List Line-Up::
|
|
5376 * Operator Line-Up::
|
|
5377 * Comment Line-Up::
|
|
5378 * Misc Line-Up::
|
|
5379 @end menu
|
|
5380
|
|
5381 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5382 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions
|
|
5383 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
5384 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions
|
|
5385 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5386
|
|
5387 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces,
|
|
5388 parentheses and statements within brace blocks.
|
|
5389
|
|
5390 @defun c-lineup-close-paren
|
|
5391 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-)
|
|
5392 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the
|
|
5393 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no
|
|
5394 indentation is added. E.g:
|
|
5395
|
|
5396 @example
|
|
5397 @group
|
|
5398 main (int,
|
|
5399 char **
|
|
5400 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
|
|
5401 @end group
|
|
5402 @end example
|
|
5403
|
|
5404 @noindent
|
|
5405 and
|
|
5406
|
|
5407 @example
|
|
5408 @group
|
|
5409 main (
|
|
5410 int, char **
|
|
5411 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
|
|
5412 @end group
|
|
5413 @end example
|
|
5414
|
|
5415 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
|
|
5416 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
|
|
5417 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See
|
|
5418 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
|
|
5419
|
|
5420 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols.
|
|
5421 @end defun
|
|
5422
|
|
5423 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5424
|
|
5425 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}
|
|
5426 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren
|
|
5427 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-)
|
|
5428 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function
|
|
5429 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the
|
|
5430 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with
|
|
5431 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all
|
|
5432 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren.
|
|
5433
|
|
5434 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
|
|
5435 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
|
|
5436 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further
|
|
5437 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
|
|
5438
|
|
5439 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on
|
|
5440 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and
|
|
5441 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
|
|
5442 @end defun
|
|
5443
|
|
5444 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5445
|
|
5446 @defun c-indent-one-line-block
|
|
5447 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-)
|
|
5448 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g:
|
|
5449
|
|
5450 @example
|
|
5451 @group
|
|
5452 if (n > 0)
|
|
5453 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
|
|
5454 @sssTBasicOffset{}
|
|
5455 @end group
|
|
5456 @end example
|
|
5457
|
|
5458 @noindent
|
|
5459 and
|
|
5460
|
|
5461 @example
|
|
5462 @group
|
|
5463 if (n > 0)
|
|
5464 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
|
|
5465 m+=n; n=0;
|
|
5466 @}
|
|
5467 @end group
|
|
5468 @end example
|
|
5469
|
|
5470 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
|
|
5471 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block,
|
|
5472 which makes the function usable in list expressions.
|
|
5473
|
|
5474 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
|
|
5475 @code{-open} symbols.
|
|
5476 @end defun
|
|
5477
|
|
5478 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5479
|
|
5480 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block
|
|
5481 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-)
|
|
5482 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g:
|
|
5483
|
|
5484 @example
|
|
5485 @group
|
|
5486 int *foo[] = @{
|
|
5487 NULL,
|
|
5488 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
|
|
5489 @end group
|
|
5490 @end example
|
|
5491
|
|
5492 @noindent
|
|
5493 and
|
|
5494
|
|
5495 @example
|
|
5496 @group
|
|
5497 int *foo[] = @{
|
|
5498 NULL,
|
|
5499 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
|
|
5500 17
|
|
5501 @},
|
|
5502 @sssTBasicOffset{}
|
|
5503 @end group
|
|
5504 @end example
|
|
5505
|
|
5506 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
|
|
5507 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline
|
|
5508 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions.
|
|
5509
|
|
5510 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
|
|
5511 @code{-open} symbols.
|
|
5512 @end defun
|
|
5513
|
|
5514 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5515
|
|
5516 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements
|
|
5517 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-)
|
|
5518 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement
|
|
5519 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in
|
|
5520 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own
|
|
5521 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g:
|
|
5522
|
|
5523 @example
|
|
5524 @group
|
|
5525 int main()
|
|
5526 @{ puts ("Hello!");
|
|
5527 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements}
|
|
5528 @}
|
|
5529 @end group
|
|
5530 @end example
|
|
5531
|
|
5532 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with,
|
|
5533 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list
|
|
5534 expressions.
|
|
5535
|
|
5536 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol.
|
|
5537 @end defun
|
|
5538
|
|
5539 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5540
|
|
5541 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
|
|
5542 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
|
|
5543 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
|
|
5544 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g. for Java
|
|
5545 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
|
|
5546 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
|
|
5547 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
|
|
5548 construct.
|
|
5549
|
|
5550 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement},
|
|
5551 @code{inexpr-class}.
|
|
5552 @end defun
|
|
5553
|
|
5554 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5555
|
|
5556 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks
|
|
5557 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-)
|
|
5558 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way
|
|
5559 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks,
|
|
5560 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith
|
|
5561 style indentation. Consider the following examples:
|
|
5562
|
|
5563 @example
|
|
5564 @group
|
|
5565 int foo()
|
|
5566 @{
|
|
5567 a;
|
|
5568 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
|
|
5569 @end group
|
|
5570 @end example
|
|
5571
|
|
5572 @example
|
|
5573 @group
|
|
5574 int foo()
|
|
5575 @{
|
|
5576 @{
|
|
5577 a;
|
|
5578 @}
|
|
5579 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
|
|
5580 @end group
|
|
5581 @end example
|
|
5582
|
|
5583 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style
|
|
5584 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect
|
|
5585 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the
|
|
5586 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x}
|
|
5587 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for
|
|
5588 @code{statement} was set simply to zero.
|
|
5589
|
|
5590 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the
|
|
5591 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead
|
|
5592 indents relative to the surrounding block just like
|
|
5593 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}.
|
|
5594
|
|
5595 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open},
|
|
5596 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}.
|
|
5597 @end defun
|
|
5598
|
|
5599 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5600
|
|
5601 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
|
|
5602 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-)
|
|
5603 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way
|
|
5604 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g:
|
|
5605
|
|
5606 @example
|
|
5607 @group
|
|
5608 something
|
|
5609 @{
|
|
5610 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
|
|
5611 @}
|
|
5612 @end group
|
|
5613 @end example
|
|
5614
|
|
5615 @noindent
|
|
5616 and
|
|
5617
|
|
5618 @example
|
|
5619 @group
|
|
5620 something @{
|
|
5621 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
|
|
5622 @}
|
|
5623 @sssTBasicOffset{}
|
|
5624 @end group
|
|
5625 @end example
|
|
5626
|
|
5627 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
|
|
5628 @code{c-basic-offset} is added.
|
|
5629
|
|
5630 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro},
|
|
5631 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
|
|
5632 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
|
|
5633 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
|
|
5634 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g. @code{inclass}
|
|
5635 and @code{inextern-lang}.
|
|
5636 @end defun
|
|
5637
|
|
5638 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5639 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
|
|
5640 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
5641 @subsection List Line-Up Functions
|
|
5642 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5643
|
|
5644 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
|
|
5645 form lists of items, usually separated by commas.
|
|
5646
|
|
5647 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly
|
|
5648 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines
|
|
5649 contained within parentheses.
|
|
5650
|
|
5651 @defun c-lineup-arglist
|
|
5652 @findex lineup-arglist (c-)
|
|
5653 Line up the current argument line under the first argument.
|
|
5654
|
|
5655 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open
|
|
5656 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is
|
|
5657 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in
|
|
5658 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g:
|
|
5659
|
|
5660 @example
|
|
5661 @group
|
|
5662 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{
|
|
5663 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]);
|
|
5664 @});
|
|
5665 @sssTBasicOffset{}
|
|
5666 @end group
|
|
5667 @end example
|
|
5668
|
|
5669 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code
|
|
5670 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of
|
|
5671 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to
|
|
5672 indent such cases this way.
|
|
5673
|
|
5674 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}.
|
|
5675 @end defun
|
|
5676
|
|
5677 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5678
|
|
5679 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren
|
|
5680 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-)
|
|
5681 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or
|
|
5682 brace block.
|
|
5683
|
|
5684 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro},
|
|
5685 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro},
|
|
5686 @code{arglist-intro}.
|
|
5687 @end defun
|
|
5688
|
|
5689 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5690
|
|
5691 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher
|
|
5692 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-)
|
|
5693 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member
|
|
5694 initializers under each other. E.g:
|
|
5695
|
|
5696 @example
|
|
5697 @group
|
|
5698 Foo::Foo (int a, int b):
|
|
5699 Cyphr (a),
|
|
5700 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
|
|
5701 @end group
|
|
5702 @end example
|
|
5703
|
|
5704 @noindent
|
|
5705 and
|
|
5706
|
|
5707 @example
|
|
5708 @group
|
|
5709 class Foo
|
|
5710 : public Cyphr,
|
|
5711 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
|
|
5712 @end group
|
|
5713 @end example
|
|
5714
|
|
5715 @noindent
|
|
5716 and
|
|
5717
|
|
5718 @example
|
|
5719 @group
|
|
5720 Foo::Foo (int a, int b)
|
|
5721 : Cyphr (a)
|
|
5722 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
|
|
5723 @end group
|
|
5724 @end example
|
|
5725
|
|
5726 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}.
|
|
5727 @end defun
|
|
5728
|
|
5729 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5730
|
|
5731 @defun c-lineup-java-inher
|
|
5732 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-)
|
|
5733 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names
|
|
5734 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends}
|
|
5735 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are
|
|
5736 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword.
|
|
5737 E.g:
|
|
5738
|
|
5739 @example
|
|
5740 @group
|
|
5741 class Foo
|
|
5742 extends
|
|
5743 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
|
|
5744 @sssTBasicOffset{}
|
|
5745 @end group
|
|
5746 @end example
|
|
5747
|
|
5748 @noindent
|
|
5749 and
|
|
5750
|
|
5751 @example
|
|
5752 @group
|
|
5753 class Foo
|
|
5754 extends Cyphr,
|
|
5755 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
|
|
5756 @end group
|
|
5757 @end example
|
|
5758
|
|
5759 @workswith @code{inher-cont}.
|
|
5760 @end defun
|
|
5761
|
|
5762 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5763
|
|
5764 @defun c-lineup-java-throws
|
|
5765 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-)
|
|
5766 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the
|
|
5767 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other.
|
|
5768 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the
|
|
5769 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself
|
|
5770 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration
|
|
5771 start if it doesn't hang. E.g:
|
|
5772
|
|
5773 @example
|
|
5774 @group
|
|
5775 int foo()
|
|
5776 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
|
|
5777 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
|
|
5778 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{}
|
|
5779 @end group
|
|
5780 @end example
|
|
5781
|
|
5782 @noindent
|
|
5783 and
|
|
5784
|
|
5785 @example
|
|
5786 @group
|
|
5787 int foo() throws Cyphr,
|
|
5788 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
|
|
5789 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
|
|
5790 @end group
|
|
5791 @end example
|
|
5792
|
|
5793 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}.
|
|
5794 @end defun
|
|
5795
|
|
5796 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5797
|
|
5798 @defun c-lineup-template-args
|
|
5799 @findex lineup-template-args (c-)
|
|
5800 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but
|
|
5801 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the
|
|
5802 opening @samp{<}.
|
|
5803
|
|
5804 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is
|
|
5805 returned if there's no template argument on the first line.
|
|
5806
|
|
5807 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}.
|
|
5808 @end defun
|
|
5809
|
|
5810 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5811
|
|
5812 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call
|
|
5813 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-)
|
|
5814 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does
|
|
5815 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver,
|
|
5816 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line
|
|
5817 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are
|
|
5818 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so
|
|
5819 lineup the current line with it.
|
|
5820
|
|
5821 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}.
|
|
5822 @end defun
|
|
5823
|
|
5824 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5825
|
|
5826 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args
|
|
5827 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-)
|
|
5828 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon
|
|
5829 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line.
|
|
5830
|
|
5831 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
|
|
5832 @end defun
|
|
5833
|
|
5834 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5835
|
|
5836 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2
|
|
5837 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-)
|
|
5838 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on
|
|
5839 the current line with the colon on the previous line.
|
|
5840
|
|
5841 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
|
|
5842 @end defun
|
|
5843
|
|
5844 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5845 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
|
|
5846 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
5847 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions
|
|
5848 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5849
|
|
5850 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
|
|
5851 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous
|
|
5852 line.
|
|
5853
|
|
5854 @defun c-lineup-argcont
|
|
5855 @findex lineup-argcont (c-)
|
|
5856 Line up a continued argument. E.g:
|
|
5857
|
|
5858 @example
|
|
5859 @group
|
|
5860 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc
|
|
5861 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont}
|
|
5862 @end group
|
|
5863 @end example
|
|
5864
|
|
5865 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on
|
|
5866 lines which are the start of an argument.
|
|
5867
|
|
5868 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognised as an argument
|
|
5869 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the
|
|
5870 expressions for the operands.
|
|
5871
|
|
5872 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
|
|
5873 @end defun
|
|
5874
|
|
5875 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5876
|
|
5877 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators
|
|
5878 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-)
|
|
5879 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren.
|
|
5880 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave
|
|
5881 those cases to other line-up functions. Example:
|
|
5882
|
|
5883 @example
|
|
5884 @group
|
|
5885 if ( x < 10
|
|
5886 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators}
|
|
5887 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}}
|
|
5888 )
|
|
5889 @end group
|
|
5890 @end example
|
|
5891
|
|
5892 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
|
|
5893 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
|
|
5894 settings, e.g. as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
|
|
5895 suggestion to get a consistent style):
|
|
5896
|
|
5897 @example
|
|
5898 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont
|
|
5899 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0))
|
|
5900 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
|
|
5901 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist))
|
|
5902 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close
|
|
5903 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren))
|
|
5904 @end example
|
|
5905
|
|
5906 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
|
|
5907 @end defun
|
|
5908
|
|
5909 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5910
|
|
5911 @defun c-lineup-assignments
|
|
5912 @findex lineup-assignments (c-)
|
|
5913 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line
|
|
5914 in the statement. If there isn't any, return nil to allow stacking with
|
|
5915 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment
|
|
5916 operator too, try to align it with the first one.
|
|
5917
|
|
5918 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
|
|
5919 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
|
|
5920
|
|
5921 @end defun
|
|
5922
|
|
5923 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5924
|
|
5925 @defun c-lineup-math
|
|
5926 @findex lineup-math (c-)
|
|
5927 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
|
|
5928 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e. this
|
|
5929 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
|
|
5930 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
|
|
5931
|
|
5932 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
|
|
5933 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
|
|
5934 @end defun
|
|
5935
|
|
5936 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5937
|
|
5938 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls
|
|
5939 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-)
|
|
5940 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with
|
|
5941 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more
|
|
5942 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up
|
|
5943 with the first of those tokens. E.g:
|
|
5944
|
|
5945 @example
|
|
5946 @group
|
|
5947 r = proc->add(17)->add(18)
|
|
5948 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls}
|
|
5949 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}}
|
|
5950 @end group
|
|
5951 @end example
|
|
5952
|
|
5953 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list
|
|
5954 expressions.
|
|
5955
|
|
5956 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
|
|
5957 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
|
|
5958 @end defun
|
|
5959
|
|
5960 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5961
|
|
5962 @defun c-lineup-streamop
|
|
5963 @findex lineup-streamop (c-)
|
|
5964 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e. @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
|
|
5965
|
|
5966 @workswith @code{stream-op}.
|
|
5967 @end defun
|
|
5968
|
|
5969 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
5970
|
|
5971 @defun c-lineup-string-cont
|
|
5972 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-)
|
|
5973 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued
|
|
5974 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after
|
|
5975 another one. E.g:
|
|
5976
|
|
5977 @example
|
|
5978 @group
|
|
5979 result = prefix + "A message "
|
|
5980 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont}
|
|
5981 @end group
|
|
5982 @end example
|
|
5983
|
|
5984 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other
|
|
5985 lineup functions.
|
|
5986
|
|
5987 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
|
|
5988 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
|
|
5989 @end defun
|
|
5990
|
|
5991
|
|
5992 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5993 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
|
|
5994 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
5995 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions
|
|
5996 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
5997
|
|
5998 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types
|
|
5999 of comment structure.
|
|
6000
|
|
6001 @defun c-lineup-C-comments
|
|
6002 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-)
|
|
6003 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used
|
|
6004 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
|
|
6005
|
|
6006 @example
|
|
6007 @group
|
|
6008 /* /** /*
|
|
6009 * text * text text
|
|
6010 */ */ */
|
|
6011 @end group
|
|
6012 @end example
|
|
6013
|
|
6014 @example
|
|
6015 @group
|
|
6016 /* text /* /**
|
|
6017 text ** text ** text
|
|
6018 */ */ */
|
|
6019 @end group
|
|
6020 @end example
|
|
6021
|
|
6022 @example
|
|
6023 @group
|
|
6024 /**************************************************
|
|
6025 * text
|
|
6026 *************************************************/
|
|
6027 @end group
|
|
6028 @end example
|
|
6029
|
|
6030 @vindex comment-start-skip
|
|
6031 @example
|
|
6032 @group
|
|
6033 /**************************************************
|
|
6034 Free form text comments:
|
|
6035 In comments with a long delimiter line at the
|
|
6036 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines
|
|
6037 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The
|
|
6038 delimiter line is whatever matches the
|
|
6039 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp.
|
|
6040 **************************************************/
|
|
6041 @end group
|
|
6042 @end example
|
|
6043
|
|
6044 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
|
|
6045 the comment line prefix, e.g. the @samp{*} that usually starts every
|
|
6046 line inside a comment.
|
|
6047
|
|
6048 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
|
|
6049 @end defun
|
|
6050
|
|
6051 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
6052
|
|
6053 @defun c-lineup-comment
|
|
6054 @findex lineup-comment (c-)
|
|
6055 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable
|
|
6056 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a
|
|
6057 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved.
|
|
6058
|
|
6059 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset
|
|
6060 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-)
|
|
6061 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can
|
|
6062 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form
|
|
6063
|
|
6064 @example
|
|
6065 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}})
|
|
6066 @end example
|
|
6067
|
|
6068 @noindent
|
|
6069 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to
|
|
6070 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount
|
|
6071 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value
|
|
6072 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}.
|
|
6073 @end defopt
|
|
6074
|
|
6075 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
|
|
6076 @end defun
|
|
6077
|
|
6078 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
6079
|
|
6080 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment
|
|
6081 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-)
|
|
6082 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is
|
|
6083 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the
|
|
6084 block. E.g:
|
|
6085
|
|
6086 @example
|
|
6087 @group
|
|
6088 int main()
|
|
6089 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment}
|
|
6090 @{
|
|
6091 return 0;
|
|
6092 @}
|
|
6093 @end group
|
|
6094 @end example
|
|
6095
|
|
6096 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list
|
|
6097 expressions.
|
|
6098
|
|
6099 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
|
|
6100 @end defun
|
|
6101
|
|
6102 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6103 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
|
|
6104 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6105 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions
|
|
6106 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6107
|
|
6108 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into
|
|
6109 any earlier category.
|
|
6110
|
|
6111 @defun c-lineup-dont-change
|
|
6112 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-)
|
|
6113 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it
|
|
6114 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups.
|
|
6115
|
|
6116 @workswith Any syntactic symbol.
|
|
6117 @end defun
|
|
6118
|
|
6119 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
6120
|
|
6121 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define
|
|
6122 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-)
|
|
6123 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the
|
|
6124 construct preceding the macro. E.g:
|
|
6125
|
|
6126 @example
|
|
6127 @group
|
|
6128 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
|
|
6129 \"Some text.\";
|
|
6130
|
|
6131 #define X(A, B) \
|
|
6132 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
|
|
6133 printf (A, B); \
|
|
6134 @} while (0)
|
|
6135 @end group
|
|
6136 @end example
|
|
6137
|
|
6138 @noindent
|
|
6139 and:
|
|
6140
|
|
6141 @example
|
|
6142 @group
|
|
6143 int dribble() @{
|
|
6144 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
|
|
6145 error(\"Not running!\");
|
|
6146
|
|
6147 #define X(A, B) \
|
|
6148 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
|
|
6149 printf (A, B); \
|
|
6150 @} while (0)
|
|
6151 @end group
|
|
6152 @end example
|
|
6153
|
|
6154 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
|
|
6155 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
|
|
6156 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g. in the following cases,
|
|
6157 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
|
|
6158 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
|
|
6159 on the @samp{#define} line:
|
|
6160
|
|
6161 @example
|
|
6162 @group
|
|
6163 const char msg[] =
|
|
6164 \"Some text.\";
|
|
6165
|
|
6166 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
|
|
6167 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
|
|
6168 this->refs++; \
|
|
6169 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
|
|
6170 @end group
|
|
6171 @end example
|
|
6172
|
|
6173 @noindent
|
|
6174 and:
|
|
6175
|
|
6176 @example
|
|
6177 @group
|
|
6178 int dribble() @{
|
|
6179 if (!running)
|
|
6180 error(\"Not running!\");
|
|
6181
|
|
6182 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
|
|
6183 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
|
|
6184 this->refs++; \
|
|
6185 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
|
|
6186 @end group
|
|
6187 @end example
|
|
6188
|
|
6189 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero
|
|
6190 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They
|
|
6191 are then added to the two column indentation that
|
|
6192 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here.
|
|
6193
|
|
6194 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned
|
|
6195 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default
|
|
6196 indentation on the top level.
|
|
6197
|
|
6198 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this
|
|
6199 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring
|
|
6200 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest
|
|
6201 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the
|
|
6202 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as
|
|
6203 described above.
|
|
6204
|
|
6205 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}.
|
|
6206 @end defun
|
|
6207
|
|
6208 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
6209
|
|
6210 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
|
|
6211 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-)
|
|
6212 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line.
|
|
6213
|
|
6214 @example
|
|
6215 @group
|
|
6216 asm ("foo %1, %0\n"
|
|
6217 "bar %0, %1"
|
|
6218 : "=r" (w),
|
|
6219 "=r" (x)
|
|
6220 : "0" (y),
|
|
6221 "1" (z));
|
|
6222 @end group
|
|
6223 @end example
|
|
6224
|
|
6225 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
|
|
6226 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}.
|
|
6227
|
|
6228 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
|
|
6229 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
|
|
6230 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
|
|
6231 arglist lineups, e.g.
|
|
6232
|
|
6233 @example
|
|
6234 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
|
|
6235 @end example
|
|
6236
|
|
6237 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
|
|
6238 @end defun
|
|
6239
|
|
6240 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
6241
|
|
6242 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont
|
|
6243 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-)
|
|
6244 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation
|
|
6245 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of
|
|
6246 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so
|
|
6247 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or
|
|
6248 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but
|
|
6249 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a
|
|
6250 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is
|
|
6251 added to the indentation. E.g:
|
|
6252
|
|
6253 @example
|
|
6254 @group
|
|
6255 int
|
|
6256 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
|
|
6257 @{
|
|
6258 return -i;
|
|
6259 @}
|
|
6260 @end group
|
|
6261 @end example
|
|
6262
|
|
6263 @noindent
|
|
6264 and
|
|
6265
|
|
6266 @example
|
|
6267 @group
|
|
6268 struct
|
|
6269 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
|
|
6270 @{
|
|
6271 double height;
|
|
6272 @}
|
|
6273 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
|
|
6274 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
|
|
6275 @sssTBasicOffset{}
|
|
6276 @end group
|
|
6277 @end example
|
|
6278
|
|
6279 @noindent
|
|
6280 and
|
|
6281
|
|
6282 @example
|
|
6283 @group
|
|
6284 struct larch
|
|
6285 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
|
|
6286 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
|
|
6287 @end group
|
|
6288 @end example
|
|
6289
|
|
6290 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}.
|
|
6291 @end defun
|
|
6292
|
|
6293 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6294 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation
|
|
6295 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6296 @section Custom Line-Up Functions
|
|
6297 @cindex customization, indentation functions
|
|
6298 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6299
|
|
6300 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom
|
|
6301 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic
|
|
6302 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want,
|
|
6303 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function
|
|
6304 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
|
|
6305
|
|
6306 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions,
|
|
6307 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good
|
|
6308 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up
|
|
6309 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up
|
|
6310 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these
|
|
6311 predefined functions, which can be found in the file
|
|
6312 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you
|
|
6313 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it;
|
|
6314 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
|
|
6315
|
|
6316 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic
|
|
6317 element (see below). The return value is a @code{c-offsets-alist}
|
|
6318 offset specification: for example, an integer, a symbol such as
|
|
6319 @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning @code{nil} is useful
|
|
6320 when the offset specification for a syntactic element is a list
|
|
6321 containing the line-up function (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even
|
|
6322 another line-up function. Full details of these are in
|
|
6323 @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
|
|
6324
|
|
6325 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
|
|
6326 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
|
|
6327 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e. setting text properties for caching
|
|
6328 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
|
|
6329
|
|
6330 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
|
|
6331 a cons cell of the form
|
|
6332
|
|
6333 @example
|
|
6334 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}})
|
|
6335 @end example
|
|
6336
|
|
6337 @noindent
|
|
6338 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the
|
|
6339 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2.
|
|
6340 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was
|
|
6341 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any)
|
|
6342 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol
|
|
6343 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic
|
|
6344 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and
|
|
6345 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to
|
|
6346 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we
|
|
6347 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare
|
|
6348 your setup for this by using the access functions
|
|
6349 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.) described below.
|
|
6350
|
|
6351 @vindex c-syntactic-element
|
|
6352 @vindex syntactic-element (c-)
|
|
6353 @vindex c-syntactic-context
|
|
6354 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
|
|
6355 Some syntactic symbols, e.g. @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
|
|
6356 info in the syntactic element - typically other positions that can be
|
|
6357 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
|
|
6358 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
|
|
6359 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element},
|
|
6360 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The
|
|
6361 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful - it gets
|
|
6362 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom
|
|
6363 Braces}.
|
|
6364
|
|
6365 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic
|
|
6366 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to
|
|
6367 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form
|
|
6368 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in
|
|
6369 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are:
|
|
6370
|
|
6371 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem
|
|
6372 @findex langelem-sym (c-)
|
|
6373 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}.
|
|
6374 @end defun
|
|
6375
|
|
6376 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem
|
|
6377 @findex langelem-pos (c-)
|
|
6378 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or nil if there is none.
|
|
6379 @end defun
|
|
6380
|
|
6381 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point
|
|
6382 @findex langelem-col (c-)
|
|
6383 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move
|
|
6384 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is
|
|
6385 non-@code{nil}.
|
|
6386 @end defun
|
|
6387
|
|
6388 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem
|
|
6389 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-)
|
|
6390 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there
|
|
6391 is none.
|
|
6392
|
|
6393 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if
|
|
6394 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is
|
|
6395 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from
|
|
6396 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}.
|
|
6397 @end defun
|
|
6398
|
|
6399 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and
|
|
6400 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a
|
|
6401 custom line-up function associated with it.
|
|
6402
|
|
6403 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6404 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation
|
|
6405 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6406 @section Other Special Indentations
|
|
6407 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6408
|
|
6409 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation:
|
|
6410
|
|
6411 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation
|
|
6412 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-)
|
|
6413 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is
|
|
6414 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is
|
|
6415 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1.
|
|
6416
|
|
6417 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum
|
|
6418 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-)
|
|
6419 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum
|
|
6420 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to
|
|
6421 work.
|
|
6422 @end defopt
|
|
6423
|
|
6424 @defopt c-special-indent-hook
|
|
6425 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-)
|
|
6426 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after
|
|
6427 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if
|
|
6428 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by
|
|
6429 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function
|
|
6430 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments
|
|
6431 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors
|
|
6432 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it
|
|
6433 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom
|
|
6434 Line-Up}).
|
|
6435
|
|
6436 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
|
|
6437 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
|
|
6438 (i.e. what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
|
|
6439 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
|
|
6440 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e. you'll probably
|
|
6441 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
|
|
6442 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
|
|
6443 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
|
|
6444 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}.
|
|
6445
|
|
6446 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled
|
|
6447 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add
|
|
6448 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}.
|
|
6449 @end defopt
|
|
6450
|
|
6451
|
|
6452 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6453 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top
|
|
6454 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6455 @chapter Customizing Macros
|
|
6456 @cindex macros
|
|
6457 @cindex preprocessor directives
|
|
6458 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6459
|
|
6460 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to
|
|
6461 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behaviour
|
|
6462 by setting the following user option:
|
|
6463
|
|
6464 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros
|
|
6465 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-)
|
|
6466 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this
|
|
6467 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as
|
|
6468 @code{cpp-macro-cont}.
|
|
6469 @end defopt
|
|
6470
|
|
6471 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation
|
|
6472 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is
|
|
6473 customized with these variables:
|
|
6474
|
|
6475 @defopt c-backslash-column
|
|
6476 @vindex backslash-column (c-)
|
|
6477 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column
|
|
6478 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-)
|
|
6479 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
|
|
6480 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
|
|
6481 automatically insert or align such backslashes,
|
|
6482 e.g. @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
|
|
6483
|
|
6484 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
|
|
6485 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
|
|
6486 next tab stop (i.e. next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
|
|
6487 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
|
|
6488 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
|
|
6489 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
|
|
6490 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too
|
|
6491 long ``stick out'' instead.
|
|
6492
|
|
6493 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable
|
|
6494 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
|
|
6495 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}.
|
|
6496 @end defopt
|
|
6497
|
|
6498 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes
|
|
6499 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
|
|
6500 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
|
|
6501 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
|
|
6502 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g. by
|
|
6503 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
|
|
6504 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
|
|
6505
|
|
6506 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically
|
|
6507 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes
|
|
6508 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command
|
|
6509 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}).
|
|
6510 @end defopt
|
|
6511
|
|
6512 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6513 @node Odds and Ends, Sample .emacs File, Custom Macros, Top
|
|
6514 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6515 @chapter Odds and Ends
|
|
6516 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6517
|
|
6518 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here.
|
|
6519
|
|
6520 @defopt c-require-final-newline
|
|
6521 @vindex require-final-newline (c-)
|
|
6522 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved.
|
|
6523 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies
|
|
6524 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving
|
|
6525 Buffers,,, @lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a
|
|
6526 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch
|
|
6527 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language.
|
|
6528
|
|
6529 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the
|
|
6530 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines.
|
|
6531 These are C, C++ and Objective-C.
|
|
6532 @end defopt
|
|
6533
|
|
6534 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p
|
|
6535 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-)
|
|
6536 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown
|
|
6537 in the echo area when it's indented (unless
|
|
6538 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when
|
|
6539 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you
|
|
6540 want.
|
|
6541 @end defopt
|
|
6542
|
|
6543 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors
|
|
6544 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-)
|
|
6545 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and
|
|
6546 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there
|
|
6547 is no corresponding @code{if}.
|
|
6548
|
|
6549 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for
|
|
6550 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can
|
|
6551 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct
|
|
6552 anchoring position to indent the line in that case.
|
|
6553 @end defopt
|
|
6554
|
|
6555
|
|
6556 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6557 @node Sample .emacs File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top
|
|
6558 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6559 @appendix Sample .emacs File
|
|
6560 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6561
|
|
6562 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way.
|
|
6563 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want
|
|
6564 to change some of the actual values.
|
|
6565
|
|
6566 @verbatim
|
|
6567 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in
|
|
6568 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on,
|
|
6569 ;; inherit from it.
|
|
6570 (defun my-c-initialization-hook ()
|
|
6571 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
|
|
6572 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook)
|
|
6573
|
|
6574 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style
|
|
6575 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol
|
|
6576 ;; made by a style.
|
|
6577 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++)))
|
|
6578
|
|
6579 ;; Create my personal style.
|
|
6580 (defconst my-c-style
|
|
6581 '((c-tab-always-indent . t)
|
|
6582 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
|
|
6583 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after)
|
|
6584 (brace-list-open)))
|
|
6585 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before)
|
|
6586 (inher-intro)
|
|
6587 (case-label after)
|
|
6588 (label after)
|
|
6589 (access-label after)))
|
|
6590 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
|
|
6591 empty-defun-braces
|
|
6592 defun-close-semi))
|
|
6593 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
|
|
6594 (substatement-open . 0)
|
|
6595 (case-label . 4)
|
|
6596 (block-open . 0)
|
|
6597 (knr-argdecl-intro . -)))
|
|
6598 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t))
|
|
6599 "My C Programming Style")
|
|
6600 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style)
|
|
6601
|
|
6602 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode.
|
|
6603 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
|
|
6604 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer
|
|
6605 (c-set-style "PERSONAL")
|
|
6606 ;; other customizations
|
|
6607 (setq tab-width 8
|
|
6608 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs
|
|
6609 indent-tabs-mode nil)
|
|
6610 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete
|
|
6611 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
|
|
6612 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
|
|
6613 @end verbatim
|
|
6614
|
|
6615 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6616 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample .emacs File, Top
|
|
6617 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6618 @chapter Performance Issues
|
|
6619 @cindex performance
|
|
6620 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6621
|
|
6622 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here.
|
|
6623
|
|
6624 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often,
|
|
6625 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large
|
|
6626 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such
|
|
6627 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
|
|
6628 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
|
|
6629 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
|
|
6630
|
|
6631 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e. take
|
|
6632 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
|
|
6633 I.e. it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
|
|
6634 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
|
|
6635 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
|
|
6636 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
|
|
6637 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances
|
|
6638 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting
|
|
6639 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section.
|
|
6640
|
|
6641 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current
|
|
6642 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in
|
|
6643 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest
|
|
6644 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan
|
|
6645 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The
|
|
6646 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it
|
|
6647 gets.
|
|
6648
|
|
6649 @findex beginning-of-defun
|
|
6650 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
|
|
6651 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g. a function in C,
|
|
6652 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
|
|
6653 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
|
|
6654 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
|
|
6655 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by
|
|
6656 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal,
|
|
6657 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file.
|
|
6658
|
|
6659 @findex defun-prompt-regexp
|
|
6660 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp
|
|
6661 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-)
|
|
6662 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common
|
|
6663 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the
|
|
6664 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs
|
|
6665 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant
|
|
6666 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular
|
|
6667 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In
|
|
6668 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This
|
|
6669 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason,
|
|
6670 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set
|
|
6671 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event,
|
|
6672 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow
|
|
6673 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a
|
|
6674 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way!
|
|
6675
|
|
6676 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks
|
|
6677 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved
|
|
6678 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to
|
|
6679 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long
|
|
6680 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the
|
|
6681 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks''
|
|
6682 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache
|
|
6683 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the
|
|
6684 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts.
|
|
6685
|
|
6686 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p
|
|
6687 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-)
|
|
6688 XEmacs users can set the variable
|
|
6689 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This
|
|
6690 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
|
|
6691 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
|
|
6692 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
|
|
6693 styles where these braces are hung (e.g. most JDK-derived Java styles),
|
|
6694 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
|
|
6695 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
|
|
6696 Emacs' recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
|
|
6697 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable
|
|
6698 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should
|
|
6699 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect
|
|
6700 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
|
|
6701 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
|
|
6702
|
|
6703 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
|
|
6704 i.e. comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
|
|
6705 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
|
|
6706 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
|
|
6707 edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
|
|
6708
|
|
6709 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
|
|
6710 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
|
|
6711 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
|
|
6712 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e. Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
|
|
6713 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
|
|
6714 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
|
|
6715 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
|
|
6716
|
|
6717 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the
|
|
6718 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration}
|
|
6719 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible
|
|
6720 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for
|
|
6721 more info.
|
|
6722
|
|
6723
|
|
6724 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6725 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top
|
|
6726 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6727 @chapter Limitations and Known Bugs
|
|
6728 @cindex limitations
|
|
6729 @cindex bugs
|
|
6730 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6731
|
|
6732 @itemize @bullet
|
|
6733 @item
|
|
6734 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences
|
|
6735 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time
|
|
6736 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs,
|
|
6737 and are now utterly obsolete.)
|
|
6738
|
|
6739 @item
|
|
6740 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines})
|
|
6741 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive
|
|
6742 editing.
|
|
6743
|
|
6744 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as
|
|
6745 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With
|
|
6746 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only
|
|
6747 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
|
|
6748 intention to change this goal.
|
|
6749
|
|
6750 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
|
|
6751 other tool instead, e.g. @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
|
|
6752 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
|
|
6753 @ccmode{}.
|
|
6754
|
|
6755 @item
|
|
6756 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
|
|
6757 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
|
|
6758 it and font-locks it OK. Templates used in expressions, and nested
|
|
6759 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
|
|
6760 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
|
|
6761
|
|
6762 @item
|
|
6763 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears:
|
|
6764
|
|
6765 @example
|
|
6766 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3)
|
|
6767 @end example
|
|
6768
|
|
6769 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some
|
|
6770 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic
|
|
6771 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a
|
|
6772 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly
|
|
6773 early on:
|
|
6774
|
|
6775 @example
|
|
6776 (defun my-load-cc-fonts ()
|
|
6777 (require "cc-fonts"))
|
|
6778 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts)
|
|
6779 @end example
|
|
6780 @end itemize
|
|
6781
|
|
6782 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6783 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top
|
|
6784 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6785 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
6786 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6787
|
|
6788 @itemize @bullet
|
|
6789 @item
|
|
6790 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?}
|
|
6791
|
|
6792 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}.
|
|
6793
|
|
6794 @item
|
|
6795 @kindex RET
|
|
6796 @kindex C-j
|
|
6797 @emph{Why doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?}
|
|
6798
|
|
6799 Emacs' convention is that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that
|
|
6800 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. You can make @kbd{RET} do this
|
|
6801 too by adding this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
|
|
6802
|
|
6803 @example
|
|
6804 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)
|
|
6805 @end example
|
|
6806
|
|
6807 @xref{Getting Started}. This is a very common question. If you want
|
|
6808 this to be the default behavior, don't lobby us, lobby RMS! @t{:-)}
|
|
6809
|
|
6810 @item
|
|
6811 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
|
|
6812
|
|
6813 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting
|
|
6814 Started}.
|
|
6815
|
|
6816 @item
|
|
6817 @kindex C-x h
|
|
6818 @kindex C-M-\
|
|
6819 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?}
|
|
6820
|
|
6821 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit
|
|
6822 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}.
|
|
6823
|
|
6824 @item
|
|
6825 @kindex C-M-q
|
|
6826 @kindex C-M-u
|
|
6827 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?}
|
|
6828
|
|
6829 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then
|
|
6830 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation
|
|
6831 Commands}.
|
|
6832
|
|
6833 @item
|
|
6834 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my
|
|
6835 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s
|
|
6836 function definition is void. What's wrong?}
|
|
6837
|
|
6838 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs
|
|
6839 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most
|
|
6840 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the
|
|
6841 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it
|
|
6842 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply
|
|
6843 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly:
|
|
6844
|
|
6845 @example
|
|
6846 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0)))
|
|
6847 @end example
|
|
6848
|
|
6849 @item
|
|
6850 @cindex open paren in column zero
|
|
6851 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or
|
|
6852 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or
|
|
6853 indentation to go haywire. What gives?}
|
|
6854
|
|
6855 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always
|
|
6856 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any
|
|
6857 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages).
|
|
6858 @ifset XEMACS
|
|
6859 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details.
|
|
6860 @end ifset
|
|
6861 @ifclear XEMACS
|
|
6862 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details
|
|
6863 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual).
|
|
6864 @end ifclear
|
|
6865
|
|
6866 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in
|
|
6867 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs
|
|
6868 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable
|
|
6869 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so
|
|
6870 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks.
|
|
6871
|
|
6872 @end itemize
|
|
6873
|
|
6874
|
|
6875 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6876 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top
|
|
6877 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6878 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release
|
|
6879 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6880
|
|
6881 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and
|
|
6882 of XEmacs since 19.16.
|
|
6883
|
|
6884 @cindex web site
|
|
6885 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen
|
|
6886 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the
|
|
6887 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen
|
|
6888 compatibility, etc. are all available on the web site:
|
|
6889
|
|
6890 @quotation
|
|
6891 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/}
|
|
6892 @end quotation
|
|
6893
|
|
6894
|
|
6895 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6896 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top
|
|
6897 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6898 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports
|
|
6899 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6900
|
|
6901 @kindex C-c C-b
|
|
6902 @findex c-submit-bug-report
|
|
6903 @findex submit-bug-report (c-)
|
|
6904 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to
|
|
6905 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information
|
|
6906 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise,
|
|
6907 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to
|
|
6908 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include
|
|
6909 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure
|
|
6910 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
|
|
6911 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
|
|
6912
|
|
6913 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
|
|
6914 customizations loaded (i.e. start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
|
|
6915 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
|
|
6916 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
|
|
6917 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
|
|
6918 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report.
|
|
6919
|
|
6920 @cindex bug report mailing list
|
|
6921 Bug reports should be sent to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can
|
|
6922 also send other questions and suggestions (kudos? @t{;-)} to that
|
|
6923 address. It's a mailing list which you can join or browse an archive
|
|
6924 of; see the web site at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for
|
|
6925 further details.
|
|
6926
|
|
6927 @cindex announcement mailing list
|
|
6928 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the
|
|
6929 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to
|
|
6930 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible
|
|
6931 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted
|
|
6932 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs},
|
|
6933 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++},
|
|
6934 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools},
|
|
6935 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}.
|
|
6936 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-(
|
|
6937
|
|
6938
|
|
6939 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top
|
|
6940 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
|
|
6941 @include doclicense.texi
|
|
6942
|
|
6943
|
|
6944 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27.
|
|
6945 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6946 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
|
|
6947 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6948 @unnumbered Command and Function Index
|
|
6949 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6950
|
|
6951 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string
|
|
6952 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
|
|
6953 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
|
|
6954 @iftex
|
|
6955 @sp 2
|
|
6956 @end iftex
|
|
6957 @printindex fn
|
|
6958
|
|
6959
|
|
6960 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6961 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top
|
|
6962 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6963 @unnumbered Variable Index
|
|
6964 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6965
|
|
6966 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string
|
|
6967 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
|
|
6968 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
|
|
6969 @iftex
|
|
6970 @sp 2
|
|
6971 @end iftex
|
|
6972 @printindex vr
|
|
6973
|
|
6974
|
|
6975 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6976 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top
|
|
6977 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
|
|
6978 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index
|
|
6979 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6980
|
|
6981 @printindex cp
|
|
6982
|
|
6983
|
|
6984 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6985 @comment Epilogue.
|
|
6986 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
|
|
6987
|
|
6988 @iftex
|
|
6989 @page
|
|
6990 @summarycontents
|
|
6991 @contents
|
|
6992 @end iftex
|
|
6993
|
|
6994 @bye
|
|
6995
|
|
6996 @ignore
|
|
6997 arch-tag: c4cab162-5e57-4366-bdce-4a9db2fc97f0
|
|
6998 @end ignore
|